JP7286488B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

In some pachinko game machines and slot machines, when a variable display result becomes a specific display result, a big win is advantageous to the player.

In this type of game machine, it is possible to execute a timer notice (predetermined effect) in which a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means are updated and displayed in parallel, and the numerical value of each timer notice image is " 0”, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect such as a cut-in notice that suggests the possibility of a big hit (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-99548 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the effect time of each timer notice (the numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, the suggestive effect is performed when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest because there is no unexpectedness.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of surprise and enhancing interest.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect for updating and displaying a predetermined display and capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state;
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, it is possible to display a first predetermined display and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display, which are displays suggesting the start timing of the suggestive effect, and
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display, and a numerical value that is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display and is displayed as the second predetermined display. A second update display that performs a decreasing update display can be performed such that at least a portion of each update display period overlaps,
the suggestive effect can be started when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display;
When the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display decreases to a specific numerical value greater than 0 in the second update display, the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display stops decreasing, and the specific numerical value is reached. terminating the second predetermined display that has become a numerical value, and starting the suggestive effect in the display area of the second predetermined display ;
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an interlocking effect interlocked with the update display of the second predetermined display.
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) to update and display a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)). Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display (for example, "15:00") is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display. a second update display that performs an update display for decreasing the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed as the second predetermined display so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. and (see FIG. 8-20 (D)),
When the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 finishes the second update display at timing Ta3 , at a timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the effect image Z15 is displayed around it, all the decoration pattern display areas 5L, After the decorative patterns 5C and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is restarted at timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has passed from timing Ta4. The part where the pseudo-continuous effect is started (see Figures 8-24 and 8-25),
When the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 in the second update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the second timer image Z12 to "1:00", the second update display is stopped, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and the effect image Z16 is displayed around it, and then the dialogue notice is started. 8-24, see Figure 8-25),
As the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a variable display result When you hit a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (2 times) and the pattern of dialogue announcement patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when you lose),
moreover,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the numerical value when the suggestive effect is executed differs between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, the degree of unexpectedness increases, and thus the interest is improved. Furthermore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect executing means can display a numerical value smaller than the numerical value of the first predetermined display as the numerical value of the second predetermined display at a higher rate than a numerical value larger than the numerical value of the first predetermined display (for example, , "15:00" is displayed on the first timer image Z11 in the patterns TY-1 to TY-5 of the timer notice, while "15:00" is displayed in the second timer image Z12 in the patterns TY-2, TY-3, and TY-5. The part that displays "10:00" (see Fig. 8-21(A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period until the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value is shortened, so the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 However, when the variable display result is a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (twice) and the dialogue notice patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when it is lost),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 than when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0. (For example, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is a specific numerical value (“1:00”), the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become a specific numerical value, and only the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is The part where the execution of the dialogue announcement of patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability is decided at a higher rate than when it becomes a numerical value indicating “0” (“0:00”))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect in a manner in which the second update display ends before the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the part that can execute the timer notice based on the pattern TY-2 that terminates the second update display when the numerical value is "5:00")
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The production executing means is
While the first update display is being executed as the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the second predetermined display and start the second update display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first update After the display is started, the portion where the second update display is started at the timing T1 before the timing T3 at which the first update display ends (see FIG. 8-20(D)),
When the first update display is being executed and before the second predetermined display is displayed, the second predetermined display is displayed to provide a special effect suggesting that the second update display is started. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 starts the first update display, the second timer image Z12 is displayed and the second update display is performed before the timing Ta2 at which the second timer image Z12 is displayed. A part where a special effect is performed to suggest that the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the second update display.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect executing means can execute an interlocking effect interlocked with the update display of the second predetermined display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the decrease in the numerical value by the first update display. A part that outputs sounds such as "5...4..." and flashes the game effect lamp 9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of updating display of numerical values.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to means 7 to 13 below. Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that reduces the number of colors used and executes an effect in a monochrome mode, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-2224. However, since the number of colors is merely reduced, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the amusement of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

The game machine of means 7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine of means 7,
The common display color is a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed in the normal effect state and the specific effect state (for example, it is displayed as "white"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 8,
It further comprises a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 etc.) that can emit light according to the effect being executed,
The light emitting means emits light in the number of colors corresponding to the number of colors to be displayed on the display means in the specific effect state (for example, in step 074AKS056, the number of colors corresponding to the number of colors of the monochrome image is displayed). number of colors, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the game is in the specific effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 9,
In the specific effect state, the number of colors of the specific display and the background image displayed by the display means is reduced more than in the normal effect state (for example, in the processing of step 074AKS056, the monochrome effect is executed. By starting (monochrome output processing), a monochrome target image such as a pending display, an active display, a background image, etc. is displayed in a monochrome mode, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the game is in the specific effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 10,
In the specific performance state, the performance sound output in the normal performance state can be controlled silently, and when the change performance is executed in the specific performance state, the change performance is started. (For example, during a specific production state, the output sound is muted, and for the change production, only the execution start sound is output and the success sound or failure sound is not output, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to highlight the specific effect state and to recognize the start of execution of the change effect.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 11,
When the changing effect is executed in the specific effect state, and the display color of the specific display is changed when the specific effect state is shifted to the normal effect state, the specific display is at the transition timing. Output a change notification sound that notifies that the display color of has changed (for example, for success sound or failure sound, output at the timing when the monochrome effect ends),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the specific display has changed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 12,
The number of colors of the special information that does not suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is not reduced even in the specific effect state (for example, the main board 11 For images for displaying information according to commands, etc. sent from the
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the content suggested by the special information even in the specific effect state, and prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) presentation mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) presentation mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of timer announcement effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a timer notice, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a timer notice and a dialogue notice, (C) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the timer notice, and (D). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an update display of a timer advance notice; (A) is a diagram showing a timer notice type, and (B) is a diagram showing a line notice type. (A) is a diagram showing a timer notice type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a dialogue notice type determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a timer advance notice update display based on pattern TY-2, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a timer advance notice update display based on pattern TY-5, and (C) is an example of a timer advance notice effect operation. is a timing chart showing (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an operation example of the timer advance notice effect. (A) to (I) are diagrams showing other operation examples of the timer advance notice effect. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an operation example of timer notice as Modification 2, (G) is a diagram showing a pattern of numerical values displayed at the start, and (H) is a diagram showing a pattern of updating speed. (A) is a diagram for explaining the details of the timer advance notice as Modified Example 3, (B) is a diagram showing an example of an updated display of the timer advance notice, and (C) is a diagram showing an operation example of the timer advance notice effect. 14 is a timing chart showing an operation example of a timer announcement effect as Modified Example 4. FIG. (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an operation example of the timer advance notice effect. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table according to variable display results; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of starting winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example with the production|presentation control command received by the production|presentation control board side, and the process content performed by command analysis process according to the received production|presentation control command. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an active display mode determination table; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display mode change pattern determination table at the time of the number of reservations 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of monochrome effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining whether or not to execute a monochrome effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining the end timing of monochrome effect; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting processing such as monochrome effect; 8A and 8B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode change pattern determination table and an active display change timing determination table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation operation|movement at the time of monochrome production|presentation and change production|presentation being performed. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation performed as suggestion production|presentation during rear variable display, and an effect|presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio, an effect pattern, and an execution expectation level of an effect to be executed as a suggestive effect during front variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characterizing part 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-17.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball-hitting handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is the left-game area 103SG002L by operating the ball-hitting handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 103SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 103SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 103SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052, is accommodated in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

Since the substrate case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the store clerk possessing the setting key. The lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 103SG201. In other words, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 103SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 103SG025A, a second pending display device 103SG025B capable of displaying the second pending memory number, a normal symbol display device 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, a normal pattern pending display device 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal pattern pending memory number, A round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display section 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 103SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two types of big win symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 103SG025A and the second suspension display 103SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 103SG025A and second pending display 103SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the section 103SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 103SG025A is lit, and the second pending When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG025B are lit), after the second special figure reservation storage becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory, the first special figure reservation A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 103SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and the second movable body 103SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Furthermore, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, after temporarily stopping and displaying the production pattern, the production pattern is changed again (pseudo continuous fluctuation, re-variation). includes a variation pattern that executes a “pseudo-continuous” variation display effect that makes it appear as if the variation display is being performed multiple times. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, since it is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit becomes higher in the order of the variable display result "big hit", the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random number value for pattern type determination, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, a form in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern is exemplified. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may differ depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous performance three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown) ), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a losing variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), a normal figure display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal figure variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. .

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the gaming facility side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the gaming facility side as the values decrease in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7(A) and 8-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, and 1/180 when the setting value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which the high-probability control and the time-saving control are executed after the end and shifts to a high-probability high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the jackpot probability, the easier it is for the jackpot C to be determined as the jackpot type). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the big hit variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (pseudo consecutive once) (PB1-4), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), Variation pattern of super reach α jackpot (2 pseudo-runs) (PB1-5), variation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), variation pattern of super reach β jackpot (2 pseudo-runs) (PB1-6) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern.

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2, PB1-5) is the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3, PB1-6) is higher than the ratio that determines PB1-6), and the set values are set to be lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3, PB1-6) is the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2 , PB1-5) and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of the jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", and the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C" may occur. can raise the expectations of

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. assigned as. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (pseudo consecutive 1 time) (PA2- 4), variation pattern of missing super reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of missing super reach α (2 pseudo-runs) (PA2-5), variation pattern of missing super reach β (PA2-3), super reach A predetermined random number within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-6) of deviation of β (two pseudo-runs).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), normal reach Missing (1 pseudo-run) variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach α missing variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach α missing (2 pseudo-runs) variation pattern (PA2-5), super reach Predetermined random value is determined from the range that random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of β deviation (PA2-3) and the variation pattern (PA2-6) of super reach β deviation (pseudo-run). assigned as a value.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, a shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of retained memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), a normal reach Missing (1 pseudo-run) variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach α missing variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach α missing (2 pseudo-runs) variation pattern (PA2-5), super reach Predetermined random value is determined from the range that random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of β deviation (PA2-3) and the variation pattern (PA2-6) of super reach β deviation (pseudo-run). assigned as a value.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), the normal reach deviation (1 pseudo continuous ) variation pattern (PA2-4), variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), variation pattern of super reach α loss (pseudo consecutive 2 times) (PA2-5), variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-6) of the super reach β deviation (pseudo-run). .

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are completely the same between each set value as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a failure, regardless of the set value that has been set, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, it may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a mode is illustrated in which the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns differs according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation that differs according to the total pending storage number, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol, and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the second A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the number of reserved memories of 2 special symbols).

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the super reach loss variation The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 to 3, PA2-4 to 6) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach out according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. , The present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed with a variation pattern of

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the variation pattern is determined at a different rate for each setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is limited to this. Regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation pattern may be determined at the same ratio.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. Each of the first display portion 103SG029A to the fifth display portion 103SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 103SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (B) and 8-10 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed on display monitor 103SG029 in percentage.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A, and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (103SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated as an identifiable set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 is ended.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF at 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

At 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 103SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) without executing, go to 103SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as indicated by 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

In addition, at 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (103SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 103SG029 stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029), and the interrupt is permitted (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error) and the fact that it has recovered from a power failure during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 103SG029A, second display unit 103SG029B, third display unit 103SG029C, and fourth display unit 103SG029D constituting the display monitor 103SG029 as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 103SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014 ;Y).

8-12 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set at 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number It shifts up by minutes (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets three symbols as even number as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation pattern (103SGS276A). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. If the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, proceed to 103SG280A. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the process advances to 103SG277 to execute the effect determination processing during variable display shown in FIG. (103SGS277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In this characterizing part 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit with the variable display mode becoming a reach as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggesting result. be. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When it is possible, it is possible to execute the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result, prior to the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-14, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis of which the variable display effect is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-16 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , in the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-16 (B) and 8-17 (A), patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-17(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such a variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a set suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is to become and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Also, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-14, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to the setting suggestion that suggests which one of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders are displayed. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that the The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In addition, in this characteristic portion 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific aspect}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot gaming state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7) can be executed during variable display based on one of a plurality of types of presentation modes, and a reach notice (predetermined special mode presentation) based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 If setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, ready-to-win notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion.

In this embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loss than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the effect during variable display, the number of destroyed paragliders indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (e.g., eight) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which setting value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, such as the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-13, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, while extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach advance notice in the case of 103SGS292.

8-15 (A) in the production (reach notice) type determination table A, when the variation pattern is super reach, 20 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 are assigned to pattern PT-8. , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and when the variation pattern is super reach, The pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than the cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Because there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-13, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing a lottery for the presence or absence of the reach notice execution and the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Go to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-9 is not won in 103SGS292, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-15(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four judgment values are assigned to PT-5, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 wins at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of characters displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are suggested to be high (set value 5 or 6) with a low possibility of being set (low), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to high (set value 5 or 6). 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, each determination random number counter for generating these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing.

Returning to FIG. 8-13, the effect control CPU 120, as a result of performing the lottery of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} A decision is made as to whether or not the prize has been won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been elected, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is elected in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298), and proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won , Based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at 103SGS297, it is determined whether the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning at 103SGS293 (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was won in 103SGS300, when non-execution of setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is elected in 103SGS297, reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 Execution is determined (103SGS301) over setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 through PT-4 and proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is not won in 103SGS300, it is determined whether any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined (103SGS302), and if any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is selected, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 8-12, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set at 103SGS278, that is, determines whether the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. In the process, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

When the variable display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, sets the period until the start of the variable display effect start waiting timer for variable display effect start (103SGS279), and executes the variable display effect effect. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and go to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in this characteristic part 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

Further, when it is determined at 103SGS276A that the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, at 103SGS280A, the effect control CPU 120 executes timer notice effect determination processing shown in FIG. Decide whether to execute (103SGS280A). The details of the timer announcement effect determination process will be described later.

Next, after the timer notice effect determination process is executed at 103SGS280A, whether or not the timer notice effect execution determination flag is set, that is, any of the patterns PTY-1 to PTY-5 in the timer notice effect determination process of 103SGS280A. (103SGS280B).

When the timer notice effect execution determination flag is set, proceed to 103SGS280C, set the timer notice effect start waiting timer to the period until the timer notice effect start (103SGS280C), and clear the timer notice effect execution determination flag. (103SGS280D) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the timer announcement effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS280C and 103SGS280D.

As for the period until the timer effect is started, the timing at which the first timer, which will be described later, is displayed is the start timing of the timer effect, and the process of the timer effect is executed from the start of the timer effect. It is specified based on the table and the timer announcement effect is started.

At 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU120 is controlled to perform a variable display of the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU120 is the variation pattern A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the reach notice becomes an advantageous state suggestion result as a performance result. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIG. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU120, in the lottery of the reach notice, if the variation pattern is super reach, to determine the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), reach Notice (high) will be executed (prioritized) at a higher rate than setting suggestions. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. , even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the reach notice (low) winning, setting suggestions based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at 103SGS297 (high ) is not won, 103SGS301 will determine the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (preferred) than the setting suggestion. Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to the excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that the setting suggestion (low) is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 Predictive reach (low) based on 103SGS301 can be executed in preference to setting suggestions (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In this characteristic part 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a tendency of the effect during the variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, with a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern, and a high In some situations, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

In the present embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a setting suggestion that suggests a setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is the timing before reaching the reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be executed as shown in FIG. 8- 13, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is decided in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestions. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, 103SGS301 Reach notice (low ) is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Setting suggestion (low) The part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 (see Figure 8-18 of modification 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.

Specifically, even if the variable display result is a big hit, setting suggestions that can be suggested even at timings other than the variable display are prioritized over the reach notice. , the player's expectation for the big win cannot be suitably increased, and the performance can be prevented from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. high) is determined prior to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-13 of the first embodiment, at 103 SGS 298 Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , If any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. -Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the reach notice in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-13 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part.) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. and,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether there is a common effect period) and the predetermined special mode. A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-16)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and is also a suggestion of setting (for example, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) is displayed (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed and during the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes the case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice execution rate is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. As an example, the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when they can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-18. 8-18, (A) is a flow chart showing the process of determining effects during variable display as Modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the presence or absence of the execution of the reach notice and the type of the reach notice is performed with priority over the presence or absence of the execution of the setting suggestion and the lottery of the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18(A), in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, along with extracting a random number for determining the effect type, using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting), presence or absence of execution of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not shown, the effect (reach notice/setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-18 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (preferred) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (For example, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is exemplified as a form in which the execution ratio is determined based on the variation pattern and the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. Specifically, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when the hit is a big hit, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either one of the ready-to-reach notice and the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, the character (e.g. displaying an image of a moving paraglider in which appears), or displaying images in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode It may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the effect during the variable display, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIGS. It may be executable.

(Timer notice effect)
The effect control CPU 120 displays a timer image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a pseudo run (for example, any of PA2-4 to 6 and PB1-4 to 6). In addition, a timer notice (predetermined effect) that performs an update display (countdown) in which the numerical value displayed in the timer image is decreased (changed), and when the display mode of the timer image becomes a specific mode due to the update display, It is possible to execute a timer advance notice performance including a suggestion performance suggesting the possibility of being controlled to a big win game state advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 8-20 (A) and (B), in the timer notice, a first timer image Z11 (also referred to as a first timer) consisting of a rectangular frame-shaped frame image and numerical values displayed in the frame image is displayed. A second timer image Z12 (also referred to as a second timer) consisting of a rectangular frame-shaped frame image and numerical values displayed in the frame image is displayed at the left lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. be. The size, shape, arrangement position, and the like of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are arbitrary, and are not limited to those described above.

As shown in FIG. 8-20(C), the numerical value (start value) displayed at the start of the timer notice is "15:00" (hereinafter also abbreviated as "15") for the first timer image Z11. ), and the second timer image Z12 is "10:00" or "15:00" (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "10" or "15"). Further, after performing the update display in the mode of decreasing the numerical value, the numerical value (final value) at which the numerical update display is stopped is "0:00" for the first timer image Z11 and "1" for the second timer image Z12. : 00”. Thus, these numbers are numbers that indicate time. Further, the update display speed of the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is the first speed (slow) that decreases by about 1 per second, and the update display speed of the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is , a second speed (fast) that decreases by about 2 to 5 per second.

In the case of the first timer image Z11, the effect control CPU 120 sets the numerical value indicating the time displayed (set) at the start to "15, 14, 13, 12, ... 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0”, while the second timer image Z12 is displayed (set) at the start, the numerical value indicating the displayed (set) time is changed to “10” or “15”. are updated and displayed in such a manner as to be "10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1" in such a manner that they decrease by about 2 to 5 every second. That is, the effect control CPU 120 updates and displays the numerical value displayed on the second timer image Z12 at a second speed faster than the first speed for updating the numerical value displayed on the first timer image Z11.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first update display (first countdown) in which the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is decreased at a first speed, and when this numerical value becomes "0:00", a simulated While performing the continuous effect, a second update display (second countdown) is performed in which the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is decreased at a second speed faster than the first speed, and this numerical value becomes "1:00". Give a speech notice when it becomes. That is, in the first update display, the effect control CPU 120 performs the update display when the display mode of the first timer image Z11 becomes the first specific mode, which is the numerical value ("0:00") indicating "0". While stopping, in the second update display, the update display is stopped when the display mode of the second timer image Z12 becomes the second specific mode that is a numerical value ("1:00") different from "0". .

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (D), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first timer image Z11 at the timing T0 to start the first update display when performing the timer notice, and the first A second timer image Z12 is displayed to start the second update display at timing T1 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T0 at which the update display was started and before the first update display ends. In this case, the numerical value "10" displayed in the second timer image Z12 is smaller than the numerical value "15" displayed in the first timer image Z11, and the second update display is performed at a second speed faster than the first speed. , the second update display is stopped at timing T2 before the first update display ends.

Then, at timing T2 when the second update display ends, the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is erased and the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed. Then, a character image Z17 is displayed in the vicinity of the second timer image Z12, and a predetermined dialogue character image Z13 (see FIG. 8-20(B)) is displayed in the frame to start the dialogue announcement, thereby winning a big hit. suggests the possibility of Next, at timing T3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T2 at which the second update display ends, the first update display is stopped and the timer notice is ended, and after temporarily stopping the decoration pattern at timing T3, it is variable again. Perform a pseudo-continuous effect to be displayed.

Thus, the effect control CPU 120 provides the first update display for updating the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 and the second update display for updating the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 in the timer advance notice effect. and so that at least a portion of each update display period overlaps. That is, it is possible to perform the first update display and the second update display in parallel (see FIG. 8-20(D)).

In addition, the timer notice is an effect that counts down the time until the start of the pseudo-continuous effect or dialogue notice, which is a suggestive effect. update display), update display period, update display start timing, size of numerical value displayed (set) at the start, update display speed, update display end timing, display mode when update display is stopped is different.

In particular, the second update display period in which the second update display is performed is shorter than the first update display period in which the first update display is performed, and the second update display is performed after the first update display is started, that is, Although it is started during execution of the first update display, it ends before the first update display.

As shown in FIG. 8-21(A), the timer notice has a plurality of types of production patterns (production modes) of patterns TY-1 to TY-5. TY-5 based on which performance pattern the timer advance notice is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns TY-1 to TY-5 the timer advance notice is to be executed based on is determined by a lottery.

Specifically, in the pattern TY-1, after the numerical value of "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value is changed to "0" at timing T3. : 00" and the first update display ends, but the second timer image Z12 is not displayed at timing T1, that is, the first update display is performed but the second update display is not performed. . In the pattern TY-1, not only is the second timer image Z12 not displayed at the timing T1 when the second timer image Z12 is displayed as described above, but also the second timer image Z12 is displayed at the timing T1. However, the numerical value to be updated may not be displayed, or the numerical value may be displayed in the second timer image Z12 at the timing T1, but the update display may end without starting.

In the pattern TY-2, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the second timer image Z12 displays the numerical value "10:00" and the second update display starts. As shown, the second update display is stopped at timing T2A at which the numerical value decreases to "05:00" and is maintained before the end timing T2 at which the numerical value should be "1:00". This is a pattern in which the second timer image Z12 is erased at timing T2B and the second update display ends.

In the pattern TY-3, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the value "10:00" is displayed in the second timer image Z12 at timing T1 to start the second update display. :00” and the second update display ends.

In the pattern TY-4, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the value "15:00" is displayed in the second timer image Z12 at timing T1 to start the second update display. :00” and the second update display ends.

In the pattern TY-5, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the second timer image Z12 displays the numerical value "10:00" and the second update display starts. As shown, the second update display is stopped and maintained (locked, held) for a predetermined time at timing T2A at which the numerical value decreases until it reaches "05:00", and then the second update display ends in pattern TY-2. In this pattern, the second timer image Z12 is erased and the second update display is terminated at the end timing T2 when the update display is restarted at timing T2B and the numerical value becomes "1:00".

As shown in FIG. 8-21(B), the dialogue notice has a plurality of types of production patterns (production modes) of patterns SY-1 to SY-4. SY-4 to SY-4, that is, which of the patterns SY-1 to SY-4 the speech announcement is to be executed is decided by a lottery.

Specifically, pattern SY-1 is a pattern in which the line content is "GOGO!", pattern SY-2 is a pattern in which the line content is "Maybe it's hot!?" The content is a pattern of "Hot!", and the pattern SY-4 is a pattern of the line content of "Extreme heat!".

In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the dialogue announcement is executed based on one of the above four types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the dialogue are arbitrary and can be modified in various ways. It is possible. In addition, it is also possible to execute a dialogue announcement based on one of five or more patterns or three or less patterns in which the dialogue content and the display mode of the character image Z17 are different. Further, although the character image Z18 of words can be displayed in the second timer image Z12, it may be displayed in an area other than the second timer image Z12.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the timer announcement effect determination process in 103SGS280A of the variable display start setting process described in FIG. 103SGS351). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, the random number for determining the type of timer notice is extracted, and the lottery for determining the type of timer notice to be executed is specified by 103SGS351 using the timer notice type determination table shown in FIG. 8-22(A). It is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of pseudo-runs specified from the fluctuation pattern (103SGS352). Specifically, when the number of pseudo-runs is 1, it is performed twice, and when the number of pseudo-runs is 2, it is performed 3 times, and each determined pattern and execution order are memorized in the storage unit so as to be identifiable.

In the timer notice type determination table shown in FIG. 8-22(A), when the variation display result is the big hit display result, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-1, and 5 to pattern TY-2. , 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-3, 30 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-4, and 40 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-5. there is

When the variation pattern is a super reach loss with pseudo-run, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-1, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-2, and 50 to pattern TY-3. , 20 decision values are assigned to pattern TY-4, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern TY-5.

When the variation pattern is normal reach loss with pseudo-run, 70 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-1, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-2, and 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-3. is assigned a judgment value.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, pattern TY-4 or pattern TY-5 is won at a higher rate than in the case of winning, and in the case of losing, pattern TY-4 or pattern TY-5 is won at a higher rate than in the case of winning. TY-1 to TY-3 are to be elected. Therefore, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher in the order of patterns TY-1, TY-2, TY-3, TY-4 and TY-5.

Returning to FIG. 8-19, after executing the processing of 103SGS352, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the dialog announcement type determination random number and uses the dialog announcement type determination table shown in FIG. 8-22(B). Then, a lottery for determining the type of speech announcement to be executed is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive times specified from the variation pattern specified at 103SGS351 (103SGS353). Specifically, when the number of pseudo-runs is 1, it is performed twice, and when the number of pseudo-runs is 2, it is performed 3 times, and each determined pattern and execution order are memorized in the storage unit so as to be identifiable.

In addition, when execution of pattern TY-1 is determined as the timer notification type, the second update display is not executed, and when execution of pattern TY-2 is determined, the second update display will Since it will end, do not execute the dialogue announcement.

8-22(B), when the variation display result is the big hit display result, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern SY-1, and 20 determination values are assigned to pattern SY-2. , 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SY-3, and 40 decision values are assigned to pattern SY-4.

When the variation pattern is a super reach loss with pseudo-run, 40 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-1, 35 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-2, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-3. are assigned, and five decision values are assigned to pattern SY-4.

When the variation pattern is normal reach loss with pseudo-run, 70 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-1, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-2, and 5 to pattern SY-3. is assigned a judgment value.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, the pattern SY-3 or pattern SY-4 is won at a higher rate than in the case of a hit, and in the case of a hit, the pattern is drawn at a higher rate than in the case of a big hit. SY-1 and SY-2 are supposed to be elected. Therefore, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher in the order of patterns SY-1, SY-2, STY-3 and SY-4.

Regarding the pseudo-run effect, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the pseudo-run (re-variable display of the decorative pattern) is performed than when the pseudo-run is not performed. The variation pattern is determined so that the reliability of the big hit increases as the number of symbol re-variable display increases.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate is higher than when the variable display result is a loss, and timer notice based on TY-3 to TY-5 with high reliability and patterns SY-3 and SY- 4, execution of the advance notice of the dialogue is determined. In other words, when the variable display result is wrong, a pattern TY-1 in which the second timer image Z12 is not displayed or a pattern TY-2 in which the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become the specific numerical value "1:00" is selected. Execution of the timer advance notice based on the pattern TY- is determined at a high rate. 3 to TY-5 are determined at a high rate to execute the timer advance notice.

That is, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes the specific numerical value (“1:00”) by the second update display, the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become the specific numerical value and the first timer image Z11 is a numerical value (“0:00”) indicating “0” due to the first update display, the execution of the advance notice of the lines of patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability is decided at a higher rate. . In other words, the second update display of the second timer image Z12 in addition to the first timer image Z11 ( Patterns TY-2 to TY-5) have a higher reliability of a big hit.

Also, the reliability of the suggestive effect executed upon completion of the second update display may be higher than the reliability of the suggestive effect executed upon completion of the first update display.

After executing the process of 103SGS353, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer advance notice effect execution determination flag indicating that execution of the timer advance notice effect is determined (103SGS354), and ends the process.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern involving a pseudo-continuation, a timer announcement effect accompanied by a timer announcement or a dialogue announcement can be executed with a probability of 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that accompanies a pseudo-run, the execution of the timer advance notice effect is determined with a probability of less than 100%, that is, it is accompanied by a pseudo-run. In the case of the fluctuation pattern, the timer announcement effect may not be executed. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (including 100%) in a variation pattern that does not involve a pseudo-run.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times according to the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect, the effect pattern of the timer notice and the dialogue notice is individually determined for each time. When determining the pattern, the effect pattern may be determined based on the already determined effect pattern. In this case, the reliability of the effect pattern performed in the predetermined times should be the same as or higher than the reliability of the effect patterns performed in the time before the predetermined time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win from decreasing due to the decrease in reliability as the timer announcement effect is repeated.

(Example of operation of timer notice effect)
Next, the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIG. 8-23(C) and FIG. Here, a case will be described as an example in which the timer notice is executed based on the pattern TY-3 and the speech notice is executed based on the pattern SY-3 in the super reach variation pattern with the pseudo continuation (twice).

As shown in FIG. 8-23 (C), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols based on the super reach variation pattern with pseudo-run (twice) (see FIG. 8-24 (A) ), the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing Ta1 when the left and right decoration patterns are stopped after a predetermined time has passed from the timing Ta0 when the variable display is started. The first timer image Z11 displays "15:00" as a countdown value, and an effect image Z15 is displayed around the first timer image Z11. Then, the first timer image Z11 is reduced and displayed to start the first update display (see FIGS. 8-24 (B) and (C)).

Next, after the first update display is started, before the timing Ta2 for displaying the second timer image Z12, the second timer image Z12 is displayed to perform a special effect suggesting that the second update display is to be started. conduct. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-24(D), the special effect is to display the second timer image Z12A enlarged with higher transmittance than usual in the vicinity of the center of the display area, and then display the first timer image Z11. While moving toward the display position above the , the transmittance is lowered and reduced.

Further, when executing the timer announcement effect based on the pattern TY-1, after the second timer image Z12A is displayed near the center of the display area before the timing Ta2 for displaying the second timer image Z12 as described above, While moving toward the display position above the first timer image Z11, the transmittance decreases and is reduced, but at timing Ta2, the second timer image Z12 is erased without being displayed.

Note that the mode of the special effect is not limited to the one described above, and can be changed in various ways as long as the mode suggests that the second timer image Z12 is displayed and the second update display is started. For example, before the timing Ta2 for displaying the second timer image Z12, the display color of the background image may be changed to a predetermined color, or the character may carry the second timer image Z12. .

Next, at timing Ta2, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed. In the second timer image Z12, "10:00" is displayed as a countdown value, and an effect image Z16 different in mode from the effect image Z15 is displayed around the second timer image Z12. Then, the second timer image Z12 is reduced and displayed to start the second update display (see FIG. 8-24(E)). In the case of pattern TY-1, although the above-described special effects are performed, the second timer image Z12 is not enlarged and displayed at timing Ta2.

After that, the first update display and the second update display are performed together (see FIG. 8-24(F)). Further, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 changes to "5:00", the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds such as "5...4..." according to the decrease in the numerical value by the first update display. Let Also, although not shown, the game effect lamp 9 or the like may be made to blink in response to the decrease in the numerical value, or otherwise, in accordance with the second update display, in a mode other than display.

Then, at timing Ta3 when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00", the effect control CPU 120 stops the second update display, enlarges the second timer image Z12, and displays the surrounding area. After the effect image Z16 is displayed in (see FIG. 8-24(G)), the dialogue announcement is started. Specifically, the character image Z17 is displayed above the second timer image Z12, the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is erased, and the character image Z18 of "Hot!" corresponding to the pattern SY-3 is displayed. At the same time, the sound "Hot!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 8-24(H)).

In the present embodiment, as an interlocking effect interlocking with the update display of the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, "5...4..." '' and flashing the game effect lamp 9, but the present invention is not limited to this. In conjunction with this, the movable body 32 may be operated, or in an area different from the timer image in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect image may be displayed in conjunction with the update display.

Next, after the second update display ends at timing Ta3, at timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed, and effects are displayed around it. Display the image Z15 (see FIG. 8-24(I)). Then, the decorative pattern indicating the pseudo run is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed (Fig. 8-24 (J)). reference). After that, the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are erased.

Then, at a timing Ta5 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta4, the variable display of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is resumed to start the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in 24(B), the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed at the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first update display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (C), the effect control CPU 120 is the first update display based on any of the determined patterns TY-1 to TY-5 and patterns SY-1 to SY-4. , and the second update display, the decoration symbols in all the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing Ta6 when the first update display ends. In addition, at timing Ta7, the variable display of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is restarted to start the pseudo-continuous effect, and the determined patterns TY-1 to TY-5 and patterns SY-1 to SY-4 are started. After performing the first update display and the second update display based on either of the above, when the first update display ends at timing Ta8, the variable display mode is set to the ready-to-win mode, and the super ready-to-win effect is started. In this way, the timer announcement and dialogue announcement corresponding to the first and second pseudo continuous effects are performed based on any of the determined patterns TY-1 to TY-5 and patterns SY-1 to SY-4. However, since the general flow is almost the same as the content shown in FIG. 8-24, detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, operation examples of pattern TY-2 and pattern TY-5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 stops displaying the left and right decorative patterns after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, and at the timing T0, the image display device 5 After starting the first update display by enlarging the first timer image Z11 in the lower left corner of the display area (see FIG. 8-25(A)), the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed for the second update display. (See FIG. 8-25(B)).

Then, at timing T2A when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes "5:00", the update display is stopped, and the state in which the numerical value "5:00" is displayed is maintained (FIG. 8-25 (C )reference). At this time, the first update display is continued.

Next, in the case of pattern TY-2, after erasing the second timer image Z12 at timing T2B when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T2A and ending the second update display (see FIG. 8-25 (D)), 1 At the timing T3 when the update display is completed, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-25 (E)).

On the other hand, in the case of pattern TY-5, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed again at timing T2B after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T2A (see FIG. 8-25 (F)), At timing T2 when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00", the second update display is stopped (see FIG. 8-25 (G)), and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is erased to display the characters "Geki-netsu!" Then, after finishing the first update display at the timing T3 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes "0:00", the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-25 (I)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first update display, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (eg, "0:00"), a suggestive effect (eg, pseudo Continuous effect) is started, whereas in the second update display, when the value of the second timer image Z12 reaches a specific value different from 0 (for example, “1:00”), a suggestive effect (for example, , dialogue notice) is started. In other words, the first update display and the second update display differ in the numerical value indicating the timing at which the suggestive effect is started, so that the player can be given a sense of surprise.

In addition, it is possible to notify the player of the difference between the start timing T2 of the speech effect and the start timing T3 of the pseudo-continuous effect, that is, the difference in the start timing of the suggestive effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, since the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 are different, the same numerical value is not updated at the same timing by the two timers. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the start timing of the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second update display of the second timer image Z12 is started after the first update display of the first timer image Z11 is started, and the first update display is started after the second update display is finished. Display ends. That is, the second update display started after the start of the first update display ends earlier than the first update display, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the start timing of each suggestive effect.

In addition, since the first updating display of the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is started and finished, it is only necessary to wait for the elapse of time, so the time until the suggestive effect is started is delayed. However, by starting the second update display while the first update display is being executed, the interest of the player can be attracted to the second update display, and the second update display is more attractive than the first update display. By ending the suggestive effect first and starting the suggestive effect, the expectation for the suggestive effect to be started when the first update display ends after that can be suitably increased.

In addition, since the update display speed differs between the first update display and the second update display, the relationship between the two numerical values changes as the timer advance notice elapses. Since it becomes difficult to predict which of the update displays ends first, that is, the start timing of each suggestive effect, the degree of surprise increases, and the interest in the game improves.

A change in the relationship between two numerical values means that, for example, at the first timing T1 shown in FIG. , the difference from the numerical value (for example, "10:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "1", but at the second timing T2 later than the first timing T1, the first timer image Z11 The difference between the numerical value (eg, "5:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 and the numerical value (eg, "1:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "4". and the value displayed in the second timer image Z12 changes over time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are displayed in the same manner in any of the timer advance notice patterns TY-1 to TY-5. is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 may be changed to a specific display mode according to whether or not the variable display results in a big win. For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the display color of at least one of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is changed with a higher probability than in the case of a loss, or the display color of at least one of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is changed, the display is enlarged, or an effect is applied. You may make it display an image around.

(Modification 2)
Next, modification 2 of timer advance notice will be described with reference to FIG. 8-26. In the timer advance notice of the above-described embodiment, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first update display for decreasing the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11, the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is decreased. Although the mode of ending the first update display after starting the second update display after starting the second update display has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first update display and the second update display. can be variously modified.

For example, the start timing of the second update display is not limited to a timing later than the start timing of the first update display. It may be the same timing Ta0 as , or may be a timing Ta0 before the start timing of the first update display as shown in FIG. 8-26(E).

Further, the end timing of the second update display is not limited to the timing Ta1 before the end timing Ta2 of the first update display, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A). B) As shown in (D) and (E), timings Ta2 and Ta3 after the end timing Ta1 of the first update display may be set, or as shown in FIGS. The timing may be the same as the end timings Ta1 and Ta2 of one update display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26(E), after the second update display is started at the timing Ta0 before the start timing Ta1 of the first update display, and after the end timing Ta2 of the first update display may end at timing Ta3. That is, the second update display period may be longer than the first update display period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26(F), after starting the second update display at the same timing Ta0 as the start timing Ta0 of the first update display, at the same timing Ta1 as the end timing Ta1 of the first update display. may be terminated. That is, the second update display period may have the same length as the first update display period. In such a case, the timing when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (“0:00”) and the timing when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (“1:00”) ) is almost the same timing, but the numerical value (display mode) when the update display is stopped is different, so that it is possible for the player to recognize that the separate update display has ended. .

The timing when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (“0:00”) and the timing when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (“1:00”). When the timings are the same, the suggestive effect based on the first update display and the suggestive effect based on the second update display may be performed in one effect. In this case, for example, one effect combining the pseudo-continuous effect and the dialogue announcement may be executed, or another effect different from the pseudo-continuous effect and the dialogue announcement may be executed.

In addition, in each pattern shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) to (F), as shown in FIG. , pattern A in which the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is larger than the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12, and pattern A in which the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is smaller than the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12. It is possible to apply either pattern B to be used.

In each pattern shown in FIGS. 8-26A to 8-26F, the first update display in the first timer image Z11 and the second update display in the second timer image Z12 are shown in FIG. As the speed of the second update display, a pattern C in which the first update display is faster than the second update display, a pattern D in which the first update display is slower than the second update display, and a first update display in the second update display. It is possible to apply either pattern E in which the speed is the same as , or pattern E.

Therefore, the first update display period and the second update display period including the start timing and end timing of the first update display and the second update display are selected by lottery as shown in FIGS. One of the patterns can be determined, and according to the determined pattern, the size of the numerical value displayed at the start of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 shown in FIG. 8-26 (G) is determined by lottery as either pattern A or B, and the speed of the first update display in the first timer image Z11 and the second update display in the second timer image Z12 shown in FIG. One of the patterns C to E may be determined by lottery.

Furthermore, the first update display period and the second update display including the size of the numerical value displayed at the start of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12, the start timing and the end timing of the first update display and the second update display are displayed. The display period, update speed, etc. may be determined based on the number of judgment values assigned according to the variable display results. It is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays a numerical value (e.g., "15:00") displayed on the first timer image Z11 at the start and a numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed on the second timer image Z12 at the start. : 00"), and when the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 in the first update display (for example, "0:00") is reached, the suggestive effect can be executed, and the second update display can be executed. If the suggestive effect can be executed when the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value different from "0:00" (for example, "1:00"), the first update display , the start timing and end timing of the second update display, the size of the numerical value displayed at the start of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12, the first update display in the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 The speed of the second update display in can be varied.

In this way, two different numeric values displayed in one display area are updated and displayed, that is, the first updated display and the second updated display are performed so that at least a part of the updated display period overlaps, The display mode when one update display (second update display) is stopped (for example, "1:00") is the display mode when the other update display (first update display) is stopped (for example, " 0:00") increases the unexpectedness.

In addition, since the speed of updating display differs between the first update display and the second update display, the relationship between the two numerical values changes as the time of the timer notice elapses. Since it becomes difficult to predict and unexpectedness increases, interest improves.

A change in the relationship between two numerical values means that, for example, at the first timing T1 shown in FIG. , the difference from the numerical value (for example, "10:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "1", but at the second timing T2 later than the first timing T1, the first timer image Z11 The difference between the numerical value (eg, "5:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 and the numerical value (eg, "1:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "4". and the value displayed in the second timer image Z12 changes over time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of patterns TY-1 to TY-5 that can be determined as the timer notification type are all the same in the start timing, end timing, and update display period of the first update display and the second update display. Although a certain form was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. At least two or more patterns may be selectable as the timer notification type from among a plurality of types of patterns in which at least one of the end timing, update display period, and update display speed is different.

In such a case, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a first pattern (for example, 8-26 (D) pattern) and a second pattern (FIG. 8-26) in which the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value before the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11. (A)), and when the timer notice can be executed based on one of a plurality of types of patterns, the dialogue notice based on the highly reliable patterns SY-3 and SY-4 is executed. The percentage of the time when the timer advance notice is executed based on the second pattern may be higher than that when the timer advance notice is executed based on the first pattern.

By doing so, not only can the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 become a specific numerical value, but also the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 can be displayed in the first timer image Z11. Since the degree of expectation of a big win differs depending on whether the specific numerical value comes before or after the numerical value, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the timer notice is executed based on the second pattern. can be done.

In addition, even if two or more patterns have the same at least one element among the start timing, end timing, update display period, update display speed, and numerical value size of the first update display and the second update display, there are differences in other factors. You may set so that a big-hit reliability may differ.

(Modification 3)
Next, a modification 3 of timer advance notice will be described with reference to FIG. 8-27. In the timer advance notice of the above embodiment, after starting the first update display of the numerical value (for example, "15:00") displayed in the first timer image Z11 at the first speed, the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 (eg, "10:00") is started at a second speed faster than the first speed and finished before the first update display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the first timer image Z11 displays a numerical value (e.g., "20:00") larger than the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed on the second timer image Z12. The first update display may be started at a first speed faster than the second speed of the second update display and then finished before the second update display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), the numerical value (start value) displayed at the start of the timer notice is "20:00" (hereinafter, "20") for the first timer image Z11. ), and the second timer image Z12 is set to "10:00" (hereinafter also abbreviated as "10"). Further, after performing the update display in the mode of decreasing the numerical value, the numerical value (final value) at which the numerical update display is stopped is "0:00" for the first timer image Z11 and "1" for the second timer image Z12. : 00”. Further, the update display speed of the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is set to the first speed (fast) that decreases by about 2 to 5 per second, and the update display of the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12. The speed is a second speed (slow) that decreases by about 0.5 per second.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27(C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first timer image Z11 at the timing T0 to start the first update display when performing the timer notice, and the first A second timer image Z12 is displayed to start the second update display at timing T1 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T0 at which the update display was started and before the first update display ends. In this case, the numerical value "20" displayed in the first timer image Z11 is larger than the numerical value "10" displayed in the second timer image Z12, and the second update display is performed at a first speed faster than the second speed. Therefore, the first update display is stopped at timing T2 before the second update display ends. After that, the second update display is stopped at timing T3.

As shown in FIG. 8-27(D), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the super reach variation pattern with the pseudo-run (twice), from the timing Ta0 when the variable display is started. A first timer image Z11 is displayed at a timing Ta1 when the left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has passed, and after a first update display is started, a second timer image Z12 is displayed at a timing Ta2 to display the second timer image Z11. Start updating display. Next, at the timing Ta3 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00" and the first update display is finished, the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, at timing Ta4, the variable display of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is resumed to start the pseudo continuous effect, and the first timer image Z11 is displayed again to start the first update display. Then, at timing Ta5 when the value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00" and the second update display is completed, the dialogue announcement is started, and at timing Ta6, the second timer image Z11 is displayed again to display the second timer image Z11. 2 Start updating display.

Next, at the timing Ta7 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00" and the first update display is completed, the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, at timing Ta8, the variable display of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is resumed to start the pseudo continuous effect, and the first timer image Z11 is displayed again to start the first update display. Then, at timing Ta9 when the value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00" and the second update display is finished, the dialogue announcement is started, and at timing Ta10, the second timer image Z11 is displayed again to display the second timer image Z11. 2 Start updating display.

Next, at the timing Ta11 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00" and the first update display is completed, the display mode of the decorative pattern is changed to the ready-to-win mode and developed into a super ready-to-win effect, and then the second At the timing Ta12 at which the value of the timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00" and the second update display is completed, the dialog announcement is started.

In this way, two different numeric values displayed in one display area are updated and displayed, that is, the first updated display and the second updated display are performed so that at least a part of the updated display period overlaps, In the first update display, a numerical value larger than the numerical value to be updated in the second update display is updated and displayed at a faster speed than the second update display, and the second update display is finished first. A change occurs in the relationship of the numerical values, which makes it difficult to predict the start timing of each suggestive effect, increasing the degree of unexpectedness, thereby improving interest.

Specifically, at the first timing T1 shown in FIG. 8-27(B), the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 (for example, "16:00") is displayed in the second timer image Z12. However, at the second timing T2, which is later than the first timing, the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 (eg, "0:00") is smaller. Since the numerical value (for example, "5:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is larger than that, the unexpectedness increases.

In addition, in the first timer image Z11, a large numerical value is updated and displayed at high speed, while in the second timer image Z12, a numerical value smaller than that of the first timer image Z11 is updated and displayed at a low speed. The difference in the update display mode between the first update display and the second update display can be more clearly seen, and the second update display is started at the timing T1 before the timing T2 at which the first update display ends. As a result, the player can expect execution of a new suggestive effect, and the second update display ends after the timing T2 at which the first update display ends, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained. .

(Modification 4)
Next, a modification 4 of timer advance notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29. In the above-described embodiment, the timer notice is performed according to the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display based on the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer notice is For example, it may be executed based on establishment of normal reach or super reach.

8-28 and 8-29 for the operation example of the timer notice effect shown in the modified example 3, which is executed when the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern. do.

As shown in FIG. 8-28, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the super reach variation pattern (see FIG. 8-29 (A)), starts the variable display from the timing Ta0. At timing Ta1 when time passes and left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win display mode, the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first timer image Z11 is displayed. The effect image Z15 is displayed around , and the first updated display of the first timer image Z11 is started (see FIGS. 8-29 (B) and (C)).

Next, after the first update display is started, the second timer image Z12 is displayed before the timing Ta2 at which the second timer image Z12 is displayed, as a special effect suggesting that the second update display is started. After displaying the second timer image Z12A enlarged and displayed with a higher transmittance than usual near the center of the display area, the transmittance decreases while moving toward the display position above the first timer image Z11, Also, it is reduced (see FIG. 8-28(D)).

Next, at timing Ta2, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image Z16 is displayed around the second timer image Z12. Then, the second timer image Z12 is reduced and displayed to start the second update display (see FIG. 8-28(E)).

After that, the first update display and the second update display are performed together (see FIG. 8-28(F)), and at timing Ta3 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first After the update display is stopped, the first timer image Z11 is enlarged, and the effect image Z15 is displayed around it (see FIG. 8-28(G)), the character image Z19 is displayed to develop into Super Reach. 8-28(H)).

Next, after the second update display ends at timing Ta3, at timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00", the second timer image Z12 is displayed in an enlarged manner and effects are displayed around it. The image Z16 is displayed, and a cut-in notice is given in which a plurality of characters move across the display area from right to left all at once (see FIG. 8-28(I)). After that, at the end of the super ready-to-win production, the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-28 (J)), and the big hit (or losing) pattern is stopped and displayed. It informs that it has become a big hit (or loss).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described timer notice effect, another notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big win may be provided so that at least a part of the execution period of the other notice effect is the first update display period or the second notice effect. In the case where execution is possible so as to overlap with at least a part of the update display period, other notice effects are set at the timing of ending the first update display and starting the pseudo-continuous effect, or at the timing of ending the second update display and giving a dialogue notice. is preferably executed so as not to overlap with the timing of starting By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the other announcement performance as a suggestive performance due to execution of another notice performance in accordance with the end timing of the first update display and the second update display.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-99548, a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means ) can be executed in parallel with a timer notice (predetermined effect), and a cut-in notice, etc., that suggests the possibility of a big hit when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". There was a thing which could carry out suggestive production. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, although the performance time of each timer notice (numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0", the suggestive effect is performed. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve interest without unexpectedness. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can enhance the unexpectedness and improve the interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the second invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) to update and display a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)). Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display (for example, "15:00") is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display. a second update display that performs an update display for decreasing the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed as the second predetermined display so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. and (see FIG. 8-20 (D)),
When the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 finishes the second update display at timing Ta3 , at a timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the effect image Z15 is displayed around it, all the decoration pattern display areas 5L, After the decorative patterns 5C and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is restarted at timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has passed from timing Ta4. The part where the pseudo-continuous effect is started (see Figures 8-24 and 8-25),
When the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 in the second update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the second timer image Z12 to "1:00", the second update display is stopped, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and the effect image Z16 is displayed around it, and then the dialogue notice is started. 8-24, see Figure 8-25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the numerical value when the suggestive effect is executed differs between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, the degree of unexpectedness increases, and thus the interest is improved.
Specifically, in the first update display, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (eg, “0:00”), the suggestive effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) is started. On the other hand, in the second update display, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 reaches a specific numerical value different from 0 (eg, "1:00"), a suggestive effect (eg, advance notice of dialogue) is started. In other words, the first update display and the second update display differ in the numerical value indicating the timing at which the suggestive effect is started. It becomes possible to

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect executing means can display a numerical value smaller than the numerical value of the first predetermined display as the numerical value of the second predetermined display at a higher rate than a numerical value larger than the numerical value of the first predetermined display (for example, In the timer advance notice, "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11, whereas in patterns TY-2, TY-3, and TY-5, "10:00" is displayed in the second timer image Z12. Part (see Fig. 8-21(A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period until the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value is shortened, so the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 However, when the variable display result is a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (twice) and the dialogue notice patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when it is lost),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 than when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0. (For example, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is a numerical value indicating “0” (“1:00”), the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become a specific numerical value, and only the first timer image Z11 is a numerical value indicating “0” (“0:00”), the part where the execution of the dialogue announcement of patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability is decided at a higher rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect in a manner in which the second update display ends before the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the part that can execute the timer notice based on the pattern TY-2 that terminates the second update display when the numerical value is "5:00")
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the predetermined effect.
More specifically, since there is a pattern in which the second update display ends before the second predetermined display reaches a specific numerical value, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the second predetermined display reaches a specific numerical value.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The production executing means is
While the first update display is being executed as the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the second predetermined display and start the second update display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first update After the display is started, the portion where the second update display is started at the timing T1 before the timing T3 at which the first update display ends (see FIG. 8-20(D)),
When the first update display is being executed and before the second predetermined display is displayed, the second predetermined display is displayed to provide a special effect suggesting that the second update display is started. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 starts the first update display, the second timer image Z12 is displayed and the second update display is performed before the timing Ta2 at which the second timer image Z12 is displayed. A part where a special effect is performed to suggest that the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the second update display.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect executing means can execute an interlocking effect interlocked with the update display of the second predetermined display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the decrease in the numerical value by the first update display. A part that outputs sounds such as "5...4..." and flashes the game effect lamp 9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of updating display of numerical values.

(Third invention)
Moreover, the present embodiment includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-99548, a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means ) can be executed in parallel with a timer notice (predetermined effect), and a cut-in notice, etc., that suggests the possibility of a big hit when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". There was a thing which could carry out suggestive production. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, although the performance time of each timer notice (numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0", the suggestive effect is performed. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve interest without unexpectedness. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can enhance the unexpectedness and improve the interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the third invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) for updating and displaying a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)), and the predetermined display becomes a specific mode (for example, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes "0:00" or when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes "1:00") Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state. prepared,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effects, the first predetermined display is updated and displayed (for example, an updated display that decreases the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11), and the second predetermined display is updated and displayed (for example, The second update display for decreasing the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12) can be executed so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps (Fig. 8-20 (D) reference),
It is possible to change the speed of updating display in the first update display and the speed of updating display in the second update display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 to , a portion where the numerical value displayed on the first timer image Z11 is updated and displayed at a second speed faster than the first speed for updating, etc. (See FIG. 8-20(C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the speed of update display differs between the first update display and the second update display, the unexpectedness is increased, and the interest is improved.
Specifically, since the speed of updating display differs between the first update display and the second update display, the relationship between the two numerical values changes as the time of the timer notice elapses. becomes difficult to predict, so the degree of surprise increases.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect execution means is capable of performing the second update display at a speed faster than the first update display so that the second predetermined display becomes a specific mode before the first predetermined display ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates and displays the numerical value displayed on the second timer image Z12 at a second speed faster than the first speed for updating the numerical value displayed on the first timer image Z11. 20(C) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period until the second predetermined display becomes the specific mode is shortened, so the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The production executing means is
A first pattern in which the first predetermined display is in a specific mode before the second predetermined display, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined display is in a specific mode before the first predetermined display. The predetermined effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 to the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12). A first pattern (for example, the pattern in FIG. 8-26(D)) that becomes a specific numerical value before and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is higher than the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11. A second pattern (see FIG. 8-26 (A)) that becomes a specific numerical value before, and a portion that can execute a timer notice based on any one of a plurality of types of patterns),
As the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a variable display result When you hit a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (2 times) and the pattern of dialogue announcement patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when you lose),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the predetermined effect is executed based on the second pattern than when the predetermined effect is executed based on the first pattern (for example, As for the ratio of executing the advance notice based on the patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability, the timer advance notice is executed based on the first pattern when the timer advance notice is executed based on the second pattern. It may be higher than the time.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined effect is performed based on the second pattern.

(Fourth invention)
Further, the present embodiment includes a fourth invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-99548, a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means ) can be executed in parallel with a timer notice (predetermined effect), and a cut-in notice, etc., that suggests the possibility of a big hit when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". There was a thing which could carry out suggestive production. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, although the performance time of each timer notice (numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0", the suggestive effect is performed. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve interest without unexpectedness. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can enhance the unexpectedness and improve the interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) for updating and displaying a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)), and the predetermined display becomes a specific mode (for example, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes "0:00" or when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes "1:00") Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state. prepared,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effect, a first update display for performing update display of the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display (for example, an update display for decreasing the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11), and a display as the second predetermined display. A second update display that performs update display of the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 (for example, an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12) can be executed so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. (See FIG. 8-20 (D)),
In the first predetermined display, a numerical value larger than the second predetermined display is displayed,
In the first update display, the update display may be performed faster than the second update display, and the first predetermined display may be set to the specific mode before the second predetermined display is set to the specific mode. possible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a numerical value (eg, “20:00”) larger than the numerical value (eg, “10:00”) displayed in the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is displayed, and the first update display is started at a first speed faster than the second speed of the second update display and then finished before the second update display.Modification 3 of FIG. , see modification 4 in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first update display and the second update display differ in numerical value and update display speed, which increases the degree of unexpectedness and enhances interest.
Specifically, in the first update display, by updating and displaying a numerical value larger than the numerical value updated in the second update display at a faster speed than in the second update display, and ending earlier, the timer can be displayed as the timer notice elapses. As a result, the relationship between the two numerical values changes, which makes it difficult to predict the start timing of each suggestive effect, increasing the degree of surprise, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The production executing means is
A first pattern in which the first predetermined display is in a specific mode before the second predetermined display, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined display is in a specific mode before the first predetermined display. The predetermined effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 to the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12). A first pattern (for example, the pattern in FIG. 8-26(D)) that becomes a specific numerical value before and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is higher than the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11. A second pattern (see FIG. 8-26 (A)) that becomes a specific numerical value before, and a portion that can execute a timer notice based on any one of a plurality of types of patterns),
As the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a variable display result When you hit a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (2 times) and the pattern of dialogue announcement patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when you lose),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the predetermined effect is executed based on the second pattern than when the predetermined effect is executed based on the first pattern (for example, As for the ratio of executing the advance notice based on the patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability, the timer advance notice is executed based on the first pattern when the timer advance notice is executed based on the second pattern. It may be higher than the time.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined effect is performed based on the second pattern.

(description of variations and applications)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the update display of the predetermined display, a mode in which the time (numerical value) displayed on the timer such as the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is applied is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical values to be updated and displayed may be arbitrary numerical values indicating time, period, probability, level, ratio, distance, dimension, amount, order, etc. Applicable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a numerical value indicating "0", an example is given in which "0:00" indicating time is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and indicates "0". The numerical value may include, for example, a decimal number greater than or equal to "0" and less than "1," a decimal number greater than "-1" and less than "0."

Further, in the above embodiment, as a specific numerical value different from "0", the embodiment has been exemplified in which the numerical value "1" larger than "0" is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the specific numerical value may be a numerical value greater than "1" (such as "2" or "3") or a numerical value less than "0" (such as "-1"). It can be an integer.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the dialogue announcement (suggestive effect) is executed when the number displayed in the second update display (second countdown) becomes "1" was exemplified, but the present invention is similar to this. However, in the second update display, a suggestion effect is executed when "GO!" is displayed after "1" is displayed, such as "... 3, 2, 1, GO!" You may make it In other words, the suggestion effect may be executed not only when "1", which is a specific numerical value different from "0", is displayed, but also when a predetermined time has passed since "1" was displayed. In this case, when a predetermined period of time elapses after "1" is displayed, a specific display such as the characters "GO!" or an image of an explosion of something may be performed. Therefore, although the display is not updated to "0" in appearance, the start timing of the suggestive effect may be the same as or before or after the timing of the update display to "0".

In the above-described embodiment, the numerical value is displayed within the frame of the timer image, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to simply display numerical values in a predetermined display area instead of displaying them in the display area. Further, the predetermined display may be displayed not only on the image display device 5, but also on a 7-segment display, for example.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect for updating and displaying a predetermined display, a mode is exemplified in which a timer notice capable of updating display of time is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time It is also possible to apply a countdown notice or the like that counts so that the numerical value other than the number decreases.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an update display of the predetermined display, an example is given in which an update display that decreases the numerical value (time) displayed in the predetermined display (timer image) is applied, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be an updated display that increments the displayed numerical value instead of the displayed value. In this case, for example, the numerical value indicating the level, probability, etc. is increased to a predetermined specified value (for example, 100) and updated and displayed, or the numerical value indicating the degree of expectation is increased step by step and updated and displayed. A step-up notice or the like can be applied as a predetermined effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an update display of the predetermined display, an example is given in which the numerical value (time) displayed in the predetermined display (timer image) is updated and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the updated display of the numerical value, for example, the display mode changes so that the decrease or increase of the numerical value can be specified, and the effect image displayed in a manner that can specify that the numerical value has become "0" is used. An update display of the predetermined display may be applied. Specifically, a level gauge (predetermined display) capable of displaying a level in stages is increased or decreased within a range from "0" to "MAX" to perform an update display.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state, a form is exemplified in which a pseudo-continuous effect, a dialogue notice, a super reach effect, a cut-in notice, etc. are applied, but the present invention is this. , and various effects other than the above (for example, prefetching suspension notice, stop symbol notice, etc.) may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect) executed when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating "0" in the first update display, and the second predetermined display in the second update display. is a specific numerical value different from "0", but the present invention is not limited thereto. Both of the suggestive effects may be the same type of suggestive effects, and the first update display and the second update display may differ in the reliability of the big hit and the display mode.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, two predetermined displays (the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12) are executed so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. , the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more predetermined effects may be executed. In this case, it is sufficient that at least two of the three or more predetermined effects are executed such that at least a part of each update display period overlaps.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the predetermined display, two predetermined displays (the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12) capable of displaying time (numerical value) are updated and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the types of numerical values that can be displayed may be different between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display. Notice may apply.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first update display of the first timer image Z11 and the second update display of the second timer image Z12 have different update display speeds, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the update display speed may be the same between the first update display and the second update display. In addition, the update display speed was assumed to be constant during the update display period from the start to the end of the update display, but during the update display period, the update display speed can be changed by speeding up or slowing down. You may let

In the above-described embodiment, the timer notice types are the pattern TY-1 in which only the first timer image Z11 is displayed, and the patterns TY-2 to TY-2 in which the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are displayed. TY-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may have a pattern in which only the second timer image Z12 is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timer advance notice effect is executed within the execution period of one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer notice effect is provided by a plurality of It may be executed during the execution period of the variable display, or may be executed during the period in which the variable display is not executed, such as during the execution period of the big win effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit is executed by executing the timer notice effect. , it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 is set. Further, the numerical value displayed in the timer advance notice, the update display period, the update speed, and the start timing and end timing of the update display may differ according to the set values that have been set. For example, when a special numerical value (eg, 77) is displayed as the numerical value displayed in the timer notice, there is a high possibility of a big hit and a high setting (eg, a set value of 5 or 6). You may make it suggest that it is high.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the effect during variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice and setting suggestion can be performed multiple times. It may be executable over a variable display.

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are prefetched and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 during the variable display effect at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at the timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective period of operation of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and without displaying the operation prompting image in the display area of the image display device 5 where the variable display effect is executed, for example, the variable display effect is executed Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state indication result, a form is exemplified in which a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in an advantageous state suggesting result include a stop pattern notice suggesting which pattern the variable display pattern will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common effect period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It does not have a period to perform) It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image is improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, when the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach notice in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the production mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is higher than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority etc. Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win announcement with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and motion of the movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion has exemplified a mode of suggesting which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the slot machine, the states that are advantageous to the player include a big bonus bonus and a regular bonus that increase the probability of winning a small combination, and a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), and a state in which an advantageous operation mode for the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in a slot machine, a special combination such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not complete and the special combination is carried over. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols will be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or AT state It is possible to execute a plurality of games (a plurality of times of variable display) from the time an ART state is won until the AT state or ART state is started.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if changes and additions are made within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) to update and display a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)). Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display (for example, "15:00") is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display. a second update display that performs an update display for decreasing the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed as the second predetermined display so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. and (see FIG. 8-20 (D)),
When the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 finishes the second update display at timing Ta3 , at a timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the effect image Z15 is displayed around it, all the decoration pattern display areas 5L, After the decorative patterns 5C and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is restarted at timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has passed from timing Ta4. The part where the pseudo-continuous effect is started (see Figures 8-24 and 8-25),
When the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 in the second update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the second timer image Z12 to "1:00", the second update display is stopped, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and the effect image Z16 is displayed around it, and then the dialogue notice is started. 8-24, see Figure 8-25),
As the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a variable display result When you hit a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (2 times) and the pattern of dialogue announcement patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when you lose),
moreover,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.). be done.
According to this feature, since the numerical value when the suggestive effect is executed differs between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, the degree of unexpectedness increases, and thus the interest is improved. Furthermore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In other words, since the numerical value of the predetermined display when the suggestive effect is executed is not fixed to a specific numerical value (for example, "0"), the degree of surprise increases and the interest increases, and the player will not be able to end the specific effect state. This is because the player can play the game during the period of the specific effect state, expecting that the display color of the specific display will be displayed in the highly expected display color controlled to the advantageous state when the normal effect state is entered. , can improve the game interest.

Also, the display colors of the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display may be similarly differentiated according to the rendering state. By doing so, even with the predetermined effect of decreasing the same numerical value, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display color, and thus the interest is improved.

In addition, when the display color of the predetermined effect is changed, different colors (for example, white, blue, red, etc.) may be displayed from the beginning, or a change effect is provided to change the display mode of the predetermined effect in the middle. The display mode may be changed by changing the display mode depending on the effect. By doing so, since the degree of expectation for a big hit is different, interest is improved.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, there is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs pending display and active display) that can display specific display related to variable display on the display means;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035),
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage , the variable display result will always be a "jackpot", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state, which is a state of effect that can be shifted from the normal effect state, and in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed. In this case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed, etc.)
The specific rendering state is a rendering state in which the number of colors of at least a part of the display target including at least the specific display displayed on the display means is smaller than that of the normal rendering state (for example, rendering By performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, it is an effect that changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. For example, the number of colors to be displayed is displayed with fewer colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect execution means executes the change effect in the normal effect state, while changing the display color of the specific display to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, When the change performance is executed by the change performance means in the specific performance state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, hold The display and active display are displayed in "white".On the other hand, in the normal effect state where the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern, etc.),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032, the display color is displayed in a monochrome mode. The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the suspended display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, etc.). be done. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Other form examples)
9-1(A) and 9-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (eg, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is normal state or time saving state , the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of big hit determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set to a range of 32767 to 33094 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. A range of up to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1674) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value in a range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, out of the hit determination value The range from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 9-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of winning a big hit, making it easier to determine a specific type of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characteristic portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame opened (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. It is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform the corresponding processing (step S10A), and terminate the processing within the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) to FXXX) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical value range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range to . As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is either a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is necessary to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 74AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 074AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 074AK of this embodiment, as the pre-reading announcement effect, a change effect is performed in which the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) is changed to a different mode than usual. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK, the image including the image that notifies the degree of expectation to be controlled at least in an advantageous state by the type of color, such as a display corresponding to variable display, is set to a monochrome mode, so that any type can be selected. It is possible to execute a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize whether the color is displayed (what degree of expectation the display color is). In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 074AK of this embodiment, when the change effect is executed during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display color of the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation, It has a feature that when the monochrome presentation ends, it becomes possible to visually recognize which level of expectation the display color is. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 074AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

Also, the state in which the monochrome effect is being executed may be referred to as the monochrome effect state or the specific effect state, and the state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed may be referred to as the normal effect state. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state in this embodiment, the background image is also in a monochrome mode, and is represented only by the shades of black. In addition, in the monochrome rendering state (specific rendering state), in addition to black shading, red or blue shading may be used, or black on green or black on red may be used. Furthermore, if it is impossible to recognize the degree of expectation due to color, and if the number of colors used is less than in the normal production state (unless it is full color), it is not limited to being displayed entirely in monochrome, for example, the background It may be displayed in two colors, such as displaying a part in monochrome (shading of black) and displaying the other part in yellow (a specific color such as yellow is displayed in that color, and the other part is displayed in may be displayed in shades of black). In addition, the monochrome effect changes the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the side of the effect control board 12 along with the start of execution of the monochrome effect. This is an effect in which the number of colors used when displaying a pre-stored effect image is smaller than that in the normal effect state. In other words, it does not store separate data such as the effect image for monochrome effect, but during the execution of monochrome effect (during specific effect state), the target image such as pending display or active display is changed effect. It is displayed in a monochrome mode regardless of whether it is broken or not.

FIG. 10-1 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When starting the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on ( step S201). When it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is ON (step S201; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the first special figure. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the first special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the number of first special figure reservation storage) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the first special figure reservation number can be specified. If it is determined in step S202 that the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores a starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. A starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S203).

If it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No) or if it is determined that the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S202 (step S202; If Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is ON (step S204). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game used, has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 is the stored value of the second special figure reservation storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reservation number) provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102 By reading the special figure reservation storage number count value, it is sufficient if the second special figure reservation number can be specified. When it is determined in step S205 that the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the starting opening buffer value to "2" (step S206). If it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or if it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103, Terminate the starting prize determination process.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates the special figure pending storage number count value according to the starting opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S207). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending storage count value is added by 1, while when the start buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending storage number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the first special figure pending memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. (increment). In addition, the second special figure pending memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. (increment). At this time, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting section, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated so as to add 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the starting winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random number data for determining the special figure display result is selected from the numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). Numerical data representing the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number thus extracted is stored as pending data by being set at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2", the suspension data is set in the second special figure suspension storage unit. In addition, at this time, when the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the first pending indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure pending storage added by one. (For example, the number of lit LEDs may be increased by one). In addition, when the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second pending display 25B to display the second special figure pending storage number added by one. You may make it carry out to the 2nd suspension indicator 25B (for example, the lighting number of LED is increased by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (first special The pending data of the special figure game using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit game state, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) Hold to make it possible to determine memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the first special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the first special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first pending display portion 5HL. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first pending display portion 5HL. do.

The second special figure reservation storage unit stores a special figure game (the second It stores the pending data of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc., as pending data. It stores until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (Special figure display result) Hold to determine whether it is decided to control to the big hit game state or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the second special figure reservation storage unit and the display position of the reservation display pattern (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the pending data is stored in the second special figure pending storage unit, the pending display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the pending number associated with this pending data. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", the pending display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second pending display portion 5HR. For example, when the pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display pattern is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second pending display portion 5HR. do.

After executing the processing of step S210, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). After that, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a reserved storage count notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S213). As described above, the winning-time random value determination process is a process for performing a determination at the time of initial winning. This is the process of determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small hit" and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-4). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" ( Step S215), the starting winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes its stored value to "0". From (step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 10-1 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as "big hit" or "small hit". A determination is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small winning game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, determination of variation patterns corresponding to the variable display mode of the decoration pattern, etc. are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the random value determination process at the time of winning, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when it is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Determination of whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random number value (the random value extracted in the process of step S209) is a "big hit" or "small hit", and determination of whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern Determine which variation pattern will be (so-called "look ahead"). As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening (before the condition for starting the special symbol game is established), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or A "small hit" or a variable display mode of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined display mode is read in advance, and based on the result of the read-ahead, the performance control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the performance control board 12 controls the pending display. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. ) or the state of the variable probability flag (the flag that is turned on when the variable probability state), the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S301). The CPU 103 checks whether or not the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state by checking the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag control unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified as a jackpot game state.

Following the processing of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the identified game state is a big win, which is a big win game state (step S302). When it is determined that it is not in the middle of a big hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not it is in a high base in which high opening control accompanying time saving control is performed in the variable probability state or the time saving state (step S303 ). If it is determined that the high base is in progress (step S303; Yes), or if it is determined in the process of step S302 that the jackpot is in progress (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the start buffer value is "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the starting buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 performs setting for limiting the winning determination (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined in the process of step S303 that the high base is not in progress (step S303; No), the CPU 103 10 (A), (B) from the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, corresponding to the start opening buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current game state to select the special figure display result decision table used for deciding the special figure display result (step S305).

Following the processing of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). For example, the CPU 103 compares each decision value included in the jackpot decision range and the random number MR1 for deciding the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 10-1 one by one, It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot" (jackpot start determination). can.

In addition, in the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and uses the read random number value MR1 to perform the above determination. In addition, the CPU 103 holds the random value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or the storage area of the CPU 103 separately from step S210, and the above determination based on the held random value may be performed. This also applies to the random number value MR3, which will be described later. Thus, the random number value used in the winning random number determination process may not be the random number value stored in the special figure reservation storage unit.

When it is determined that it is within the jackpot determination range in the process of step S307 (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the big hit type determination table. The CPU 103 refers to the selected jackpot type determination table data to determine which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10-5), which is prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance, and sets it in the use table (step S309). The big hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display that makes the variable display result "big hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of determination values. In an actual table, it suffices if a range of determination values corresponding to the determination ratio in FIG. 10-5 is assigned to each variation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio where 100 is the entire range of values (1 to 900) that the random number MR3 can take. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), when the jackpot type is probability variation / non-probability variation, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the variation pattern Since the determination ratio of PB1-3 is 70, the variation pattern PB1-1 is assigned a determination value 1 to 45 (range of 5%) that is compared with the random value MR3, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is a random value. Determined values of 46-270 (25% range) to be compared with MR3 are assigned, and variation patterns PB1-3 are assigned determined values of 271-900 (70% range) to be compared with random value MR3. This assignment of decision values is the same for other tables describing decision percentages.

When it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range in the process of step S307 (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S310). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , and whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

If it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 (see FIG. 10-5 (B)) is selected and set in the use table (step S312). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is a "small hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a loss variation pattern determination table (FIG. 10-5 (C), (D)) is selected and set in the use table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a non-time saving state (low base state) (when the time saving flag is off), the loss variation pattern determination of FIG. 10-5 (C) When the table is set to the use table and the current gaming state specified in step S301 is the time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss variation of FIG. 10-5 (D) Set the pattern determination table to the used table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern that results in a "loss" variable display result, and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3.

After executing any one of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the big hit variation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S209. With reference to either the table, small hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern assigned to the determination value matching the random value MR3 is determined (step S313). For example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determined values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number MR3 one by one to determine whether there is a determined value that matches the random number MR3, thereby determining the variation pattern. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit) and maximum value (upper limit) of the determined value assigned to each variation pattern, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determined value A variation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing either of the processes of steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start-winning-time command according to the determination results of steps S308 and S313 (step S314), and performs the winning-time random value determination process. exit. The starting winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure reservation memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. When the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the command at the time of starting winning is the first start winning mouth designation command, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation Configure settings for transmission of commands. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the command at the time of starting winning is the second start winning opening designation command, the second special figure reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation. Configure settings for transmission of commands. Commands set for transmission are transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure pending storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure pending storage number specification command to be set for transmission are the commands that specify the current 1st special figure pending storage number and the 2nd special figure pending storage number A command containing the corresponding EXT data), and the number of special figure pending memories to be specified may be specified by the count values of the first special figure pending memory number counter and the second special figure pending memory number counter. When the determination result of step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol designation command to be transmitted is a command designating that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" ("big hit"). command including corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result of step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" (" command including EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the determination result of step S310 is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), the command specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "loss" (command including EXT data corresponding to "failure"), and when the determination result of step S303 is the start buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), "no determination" that determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies the variation pattern that is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), When the determination result of step S304 is the start buffer value=1 (step S304; No), a command (EXT command including data).

In the random number determination process at the time of winning, as described above, the variable display corresponding to the random number MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 this time is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display (special game) is "big hit" or "small hit". It is determined whether or not it will be a hit, and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5) is determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current game state, and not based on the game state when the variable display is actually executed. Variable display results and variation patterns can be predicted with precision. In addition, in the random number determination process at the time of winning, when it is determined that it is a big hit in the process of step S302, or based on the fact that it is determined that it is in the time saving control in the process of step S303, it is started by the process of step S304 Determine whether the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, when the start buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process of step S305 and the like is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S314, and the start win determination is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the time-saving control is performed, or when the jackpot game state, the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening based on the occurrence of each of the above Restricts judgment from being made. As a result, when the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is obtained during the time saving control or in the jackpot game state. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by restricting the execution of prefetch based on.

FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S261). When it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S262). When it is determined that the big hit flag is off in the process of step S261 (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the OFF state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is "loss" according to the number of pending memories. (Step S265).

FIG. 10-4 shows specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment.

Variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", specifies non-reach (variable display mode does not reach reach mode), and special figure variation time is normal It is a non-reach variable pattern of length. This variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of reserved memories is less than two.

Variation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", specifies non-reach (variable display mode does not become reach mode), and special figure variation time is longer than usual is also a short (shortened) non-reach variation pattern. The variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the number of pending memories is 2 or more.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach A. FIG. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is "losing", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach B. FIG.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern designating execution of super reach A. FIG. Variation patterns PB1-3 are selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and are reach variation patterns that designate execution of super reach B. FIG.

The variation pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big win" and the big win type is "probability" and when the variable display result is "minor win", and designates non-reach. It is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big win" and the big win type is "definite hit", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and is dedicated to the big hit/small win. It is a reach variation pattern that specifies reach execution. Here, the definite/minor hit dedicated reach is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is a definite big hit or a small hit. The decoration pattern for the sudden hit is a pattern in which a combination of left, middle and right decoration patterns is stopped and displayed as ``3'', ``5'' and ``7''. Further, the decoration pattern for the small win is a pattern in which the combination of the left, middle and right decoration patterns is stopped and displayed as "2", "4" and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. be done. As an example, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation, and determines the variation assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 10-5(A), determination ratios are described instead of determination values.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, using the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined. As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. A variation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. It should be noted that in FIG. 10-5(B), determination ratios are described instead of determination values.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. A variation pattern is determined. When the gaming state is a non-time saving state (time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5(C). When the game state is the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5(D). As an example, in each losing variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation, and determines the variation assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. Note that in FIGS. 10-5(C) and (D), determination ratios are shown instead of determination values.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, at the time of the big hit (probable / non-probable), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB1-3 that executes the super reach B is the highest, the variation pattern PB1-2 of the super reach A, normal reach The determination ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 of . At the time of loss, the determination ratio of non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, super reach A variation pattern PA2-2, super reach B The decision ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation patterns PA2-3. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the ratio of the variable display result to be "big hit" (so-called big hit expectation) decreases. That is, the variable display with the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win has a higher percentage of the variable display result being a “big win” than the variable display without the ready-to-win effect. In other words, the longer the variable display period (variable display time), the higher the rate of the variable display result being a "big hit".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5, at the time of the big hit (probability), the decision ratio of the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 of the probability/minor reach is higher than that of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of the small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden probability/small hit reach variation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden/small hit reach is executed, the variable display result is likely to be "big hit (probably)", and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be a "small hit".

After executing any of steps S262, S264, and S265 in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 sets a special figure variation time (also referred to as variation time), which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the special symbol variation in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is. Toku-zu fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 12, is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing of deriving the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol by setting the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264 and S265. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, of the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, start Setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games for which the conditions are established (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", it is set to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", it is set to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A special figure game is started by this. In addition, when starting the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display 25A to display the number of the first special figure reservation storage that has been subtracted by one. This may be performed by the pending indicator 25A (for example, the number of lit LEDs may be reduced by one). In addition, when the variable display using the second special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display device 25B to display the second special figure reservation storage number decremented by one. You may make it carry out to the pending|holding indicator 25B (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by one).

After executing the processing of step S267, the CPU 103, in order to notify the effect control board 12 side of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, etc., the command at the time of the variation start of the special symbol (command at the time of variation start). Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 transmits the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure pending storage number specification command ( Command including EXT data indicating the number of the first special figure reserved memory count value subtracted by 1, that is, the number of the first special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special game)) is sent sequentially. Make transmission settings for On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( Command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure pending storage number specification command (1 A command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory number count value that has been reduced, that is, the second special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Configure transmission settings for

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and ends the variation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 5 is executed.

Next, processing in the effect control board 12 of the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command from the main board 11 (start winning opening designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command). It is determined whether or not there is (step S401).

When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). If the first start winning opening designation command or the first special reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, the start winning command (first start winning opening designation command, first special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . If the second start winning opening designation command or the second special reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning prize command, the start winning command (second start winning opening designation command, second special reserved memory number designation command , pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a second start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 .

FIG. 10-7(A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the first start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, a storage area that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of the first special figure reserved storage (for each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment is an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed are stored as the pending display number "0". is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of the second start winning).

When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning mouth, four commands, 1st start winning mouth designation command, 1st special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning opening designation command, first special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the first start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the first starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, the first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing display mode change patterns, which will be described later, as a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers. . The display mode change pattern is a type indicating a change (transition) pattern of the display mode of the pending display. The display mode change patterns corresponding to the pending display numbers "0" to "4" in the example shown in FIG. , "0", and "0" are stored. "PT4-4-22" and "PT3-2-04" are display mode change patterns determined when the pending storage count (holding count) is "4" and "3", respectively, as will be described later. There is a pattern in which the display mode changes twice and a pattern in which the display mode changes once. When the display mode change pattern is "0", the display mode change pattern is not set and the pending notice effect is not executed. remains "white" (in the illustrated example, the hold is not stored in the first place). Although illustration is omitted, information (stage number) is also provided (stage number storage area) (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-7(B)).

Also, FIG. 10-7(B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning command received at the second start winning are stored. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, a storage area that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of the second special figure reserved storage (for each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4 area) is provided. As with the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, has a pending display number of "0", which is displayed as a variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start winning to the 2nd start winning mouth, 4 commands of 2nd start winning mouth designation command, 2nd special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command A set effect control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning opening designation command, second special figure reservation storage designation command, pattern judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is each reserved A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the second start winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The empty area of the second start winning command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second starting winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure reservation storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, in the second start winning command buffer, as in the first start winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the pending display numbers is provided, and a display step change pattern described later is provided. A storage area is provided for storage. The example shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) shows an example in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the pending display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-6, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command is received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high probability flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the probability variable state, and the probability variable flag on the main board 11 side. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. The high base flag, for example, is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting unit), and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and the time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The ON state/OFF state is switched corresponding to the switching of the ON state/OFF state. For example, the effect control CPU120, if the gaming state specification command is to specify a high probability high base state (for example, if the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is specified to be ON), high probability flag and high Both of the base flags are turned on (if they are already on, they are kept on; hereinafter the same applies to the on/off states of both flags). If the gaming state specification command is to specify a high probability low base state (for example, if the probability variation flag specifies that the time saving flag is turned off in the ON state), the high probability flag is turned on, and the high base Turn off the flag. If the game state specification command specifies a low-probability base state (normal state) (for example, if you specify that the probability variation flag and the time-saving flag are off), both the high-probability flag and the high-base flag turn off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and performs command analysis processing. exit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10-8, processing executed in response to reception of each effect control command in the command analysis processing will be described. The contents shown in the item "processing contents" shown in FIG. 10-8 are, for example, the processing executed in step S405. Further, the step number indicated in the item "processing content" indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 10-6, and means that the corresponding step processing is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the item of “processing content” are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Also, setting the reception flag means turning it on.

For example, when the received production control command is a variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a variation pattern command reception flag.

Also, for example, when the received effect control command is the display result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 .

FIG. 10-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. When the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the start winning command is received (step 074AKS001). When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step 074AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first reserved storage number addition command received in the low base state or the high It is determined whether or not it is one of the second reserve storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step 074AKS002). In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 074AKS002, in the low base state, it becomes possible to execute the pending notice effect (change effect) when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the first start winning hole. , in the high base state, when the pending memory increases based on the winning to the second starting winning hole, the pending notice performance (variation performance) can be executed.

If it is determined to be either the first starting winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 074AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed (step 074AKS003). For example, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the active display mode determination table shown in FIGS. It determines the display mode of the active display as the final change destination of the display or the reserved display displayed as the second reserved display (how many steps to change when the change effect is executed). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning command.

Next, determination of the display mode of active display will be described. In this embodiment, a change effect is executed in which the display mode (including at least the color) of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started and the active display corresponding to the variable display that is being executed is changed step by step. . The active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-10 is a table for determining in advance the display mode of the active display (also referred to as "final display mode"), which is the final stage of the change (transition) of this display mode. The active display mode determination table, as shown in FIG. 10-10, is used to determine which of stages 1 to 4 the final display mode should be for each variable display result (including jackpot types and variation patterns). are assigned a determined proportion of More specifically, the variable display result is divided into "jackpot (probability / non-probability)", "jackpot (probability)", "losing (super reach) / small hit", "other than above", respectively, Different determination ratios are assigned to "white", "blue", "green", and "red" prepared as display colors of the active display. In this embodiment, active display is performed in colors such as white in stage 1, blue in stage 2, green in stage 3, and red in stage 4. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable/non-probability variation)" in which a 16-round game is executed, the active display mode (display color), which is the final display mode, is ``Green'', which is ``Level 3'', has the highest decision ratio, and the decision ratio is lower in the order of ``Blue'' for ``Level 2'', ``White'' for ``Level 1'', and ``Red'' for ``Level 4''. is set to On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot (accurate)" in which two rounds of the game are played, the ratio of determining the active display mode (display color) to "green", which is "level 3", is the highest, Next, the decision ratio of "blue" in "level 2" is high, and the decision ratio of "red" in "level 4" and "white" in "level 1" is set to be the lowest. In addition, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit" including super reach effects in the variation pattern, the active display mode (display color) is "step 2" "blue ” is the highest, followed by the same percentage for “white” in “stage 1” and “green” in “stage 3”, followed by “red” in “stage 4”. there is If the variable display result does not correspond to any of the above-mentioned "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probably)", "losing (super reach)", and "minor hit", the active display mode ( display color), the decision ratio is set only for "white". Further, when the variable display result is "missing", the active display mode (display color) is set not to be determined to be "red".

With these settings, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the stage of pending display) changes to the "red" stage of "stage 4", the variable display result will always be "big hit". can be notified. In addition, when the active display changes to the "green" stage of "stage 3", it can be suggested that the variable display result is likely to be a "jackpot" (probability/non-probability/abrupt probability). . In addition, if it remains "white" of "step 1", the possibility that the variable display result will be "losing" or "minor hit" is high, and if the pending notice effect is executed (that is, When the display mode of the pending display changes), it can be suggested that there is a higher possibility that the control will be in a state more advantageous to the player than when it is not executed.

In the change effect (suspended notice effect), the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" in which the variable display result always becomes "big win" is also called a big win confirmation stage. In addition, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is the jackpot confirmation stage, and as shown in FIG. 10-10, 10% Because it is only selected, its rarity value is high. In the illustrated example, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is shown as the big hit confirmation stage, but for example, when the variable display result is "losing" or "small hit", it is also determined You may do so (that is, it may not be a big hit confirmation). In this case, if it is determined to be the "red" display mode of "stage 4", the possibility of becoming a "big hit" increases (the higher the number of stages, the higher the possibility of becoming a "big hit") ), it is sufficient to set the decision ratio.

Returning to FIG. 10-9, after determining the display mode of the active display by the processing of step 074AKS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 and the first special figure pending memory number designation command and the second The display mode change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories indicated by one of the 2 special figure reserved memory number designation commands, and the first reserved display or the second reserved display is displayed (step 074AKS004). In addition, the number of reserved memories is the first special figure reserved memory number specification command when the first start winning mouth specification command is received, and the second special figure when the second start winning mouth specification command is received. It can be specified by referring to the reserved storage number designation command. In the processing of step 074AKS004, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15 is referenced to determine the display mode change pattern for the first pending display or second pending display. The display mode change pattern indicates a change pattern such as how many times the pending display is shifted to which stage (which display color) to transition to until the active display, which is the final stage, is displayed. The display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 is stored in the display mode variation pattern in the command buffer for the first start winning shown in FIG. 10-7 or the command buffer for the second start winning shown in FIG. 10-7. stored in the area.

The display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15 determines the display mode change pattern indicating the change in the display mode of the pending display and the active display that are subject to the notice of the pending notice effect, as described above. This table is referenced to The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the pending number (suspended display number of the pending memory that is the notice target of the pending notice effect) and the active display mode (final display mode). Specifically, depending on the number of pending "4" to "2", and the active display of "white", "blue", "green", "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the display color. In addition, in each display mode change pattern determination table classified by the number of reservations and the active display mode, "jackpot (16R)" ("jackpot (probable / non-probable)"), "jackpot (probability)", "losing (super A different decision ratio is assigned to the display mode change pattern set according to the active display mode (final display mode) for each variable display result such as "reach" and "minor win".

The pending display is displayed in any stage of 'white', 'blue', 'green' and 'red' such as 'stage 1' to 'stage 4' at the start of the pending display associated with the start winning. In addition, the pending display is displayed in shift as the pending memory is consumed, and at the timing when the change effect (holding notice effect) is executed, during the execution of the new variable display (including the variable display corresponding to the active display) , can be changed to different display colors (steps), and "white" as "step 1" → "blue" as "step 2" → "green" as "step 3" → "green" as "step 4" It changes step by step in the order of red. Also, the active display may be displayed by changing the stage from the reserved display corresponding to the reserved display number "1". In addition, when changing the stage, only a change to a higher stage is allowed (no change from a higher stage to a lower stage), for example, "white" in "stage 1" → "green" in "stage 3" It may be changed to a higher stage by omitting the middle.

Figures 10-11 (A) to 10-12 (D) show when the number of pending memories (holding number) is "4" (when the pending memory of the notice target of the pending notice effect is the hold display number "4"). is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to by , and a display mode change pattern indicating a change in the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is set. It is

FIG. 10-11(A) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "white" of "stage 1". As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), when the final display mode is "white" of "stage 1", the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" and "0" Only the display mode change pattern PT4-1-01 (the number of times of display mode change is "0") is set, and the display color of the active display remains "white" of "stage 1", and the decision ratio assigned for each variable display result is set. is uniformly 100%.

FIG. 10-11(B) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "blue" of "stage 2". As shown in FIG. 10-11(B), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 2". PT 4-2-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is “0”), which remains “blue”, and is “step 1” in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4”, and the pending display number “3” ~ PT 4-2-02 ~ 05 (display mode change number of times "1") is set.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the variable display result is "losing (super reach)" or "minor hit", display mode change pattern PT4-2-02 with display mode change count of "1" to 05, the decision ratio assigned to the display mode change pattern PT4-2-05 is the highest compared to other variable display results, and the decision ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", it is assigned to PT4-2-02 among the display mode change patterns PT4-2-02 to PT4-2-05 whose number of display mode changes is "1". The decision percentage is the highest and the decision percentage assigned to PT 4-2-05 is the lowest.

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes from "white" of "step 1" to "blue" of "step 2", the variable display is "big hit (16R) It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-2-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 2" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 2" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Further, the display mode change pattern determination table is determined so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You can set a percentage. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display.

FIG. 10-11(C) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "green" of "stage 3". As shown in FIG. 10-11(C), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "step 3". PT 4-3-01 (display mode change count “0”), which remains “green” and does not change, and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4” is “stage 1” and the pending display number “3” PT 4-3-02 to 05 (display mode change number "1 ”), and “blue” in “stage 2” in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number “4”, and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers “3” to “0” In PT4-3-06-09 (display mode change number "1") that changes from "level 2" "blue" to "level 3" "green" and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" "Stage 1" "white" and "stage 1" "white" to "stage 2" "blue" in either the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" , and PT4-3-10 to PT4-3-14 (number of times of display mode change "2") for changing from "blue" of "step 2" to "green" of "step 3" are set.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(C), in the characterizing part 074AK in this embodiment, the higher the number of changes in the display mode, the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "green" display mode of "step 3", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)".

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to 'green' of 'stage 3' is delayed, and the greater the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes 'big hit (16R)'. suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 3" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 3" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 3", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIG. 10-12(D) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is "red" of "stage 4". As shown in FIG. 10-12(D), as the display mode change pattern, the display color of the suspended display corresponding to the suspended display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is "stage 4". PT 4-4-01 (the number of times the display mode has changed is "0"), and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" is "white" at "step 1", and the pending display PT 4-4-02 to 05 (display mode number of changes "1") and "blue" of "step 2" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" Corresponds to PT 4-4-06 to 09 (number of display mode changes "1") that changes from "blue" of "stage 2" to "red" of "stage 4" in any of the above, and the pending display number "4" "Green" of "Stage 3" in the pending display, and "Green" of "Stage 3" to "Stage 4 PT 4-4-10 to 13 (the number of display stage changes "1") that changes to "red" of ", and "white" of "step 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", From ``white'' in ``step 1'' to ``blue'' in ``step 2'' and further from ``blue'' in ``step 2'' in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0" PT 4-4-14 to 19 (display stage change number "2") that changes to "red" in "stage 4", and "white" in "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" In either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "level 1" "white" to "level 3" "green", further "level 3" " PT 4-4-20 to 25 (display mode change number "2") that changes from "green" to "red" in "stage 4", and in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", "stage 1" " "white", and in either the pending display or the active display corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "0", from "white" in "stage 1" to "blue" in "stage 2", to "blue" in "stage 2" ” from “blue” to “stage 3” “green”, and from “stage 3” “green” to “stage 4” “red” PT 4-4-26 to 29 (display stage change number “3 ”) is set.

As shown in FIG. 10-12(D), in the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment, the ratio is determined so that the higher the number of changes in the display mode, the higher the expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned such that the later the timing of changing to the "red" display mode of "stage 4", the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)". Also, if the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the final display mode will not be "stage 4", so the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 to 17 has a determination ratio Not assigned.

With such a setting, when a change effect is performed, the timing at which the display mode changes to "red" of "stage 4" is delayed and the number of times of change increases, the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". suggest that it is likely. Separately from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-4-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "Stage 4" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 4" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes to "stage 4", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. Also, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the pattern that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" at once in multiple stages has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". You may set the determination ratio of a table. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIGS. 10-13(A) to 10-14(D) are display stages referred to when the number of reservations is "3" (when the reservation memory of the notice object of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "3"). This is a change pattern determination table, in which display step change patterns indicating changes in the display steps of pending displays corresponding to pending display numbers "3" to "1" and active displays corresponding to "0" are set. In addition, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to (D) show the display step change pattern referred to when the number of reservations is "2" (when the reservation memory for the notice target of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "2") This is a determination table, and display step change patterns are set to indicate the display steps of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "2" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0". 10-11(A) to 10-12(D), similar to the display mode change pattern determination tables in FIGS. A determination ratio is assigned so that the variable display is more likely to be a "jackpot (16R)".

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. By making the image including the image notified by in a monochrome mode, a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize which kind of color is displayed (which display color is expected) A monochrome effect setting process for execution is executed (step 074AKS005). In addition, in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, after executing the processes of steps 074AKS003 and 074AKS004, the monochrome effect setting process is performed in step 074AKS005. is executed, the display mode of the active display and the display mode change pattern may be determined.

FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of monochrome effect setting processing executed in step 074AKS005 of FIG. 10-9. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-16 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag indicating that the monochrome effect is being executed is set to the ON state (step 074AKS051). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process. The monochrome effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example.

When the monochrome effect flag is in the OFF state (step 074AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold (including an active display) in which the display mode changes before the current hold targeted for the pre-reading notice. exists, that is, whether or not the display form of the pending or active display existing in front (the display form in front) changes (step 074AKS051A). In step 074AKS051A, the content of the command buffer at the time of start winning may be checked and determined. Specifically, the display mode change pattern corresponding to the pending display number before the pending display number targeted this time is confirmed. Then, it is determined whether or not the front display mode changes.

When the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process. In the characteristic part 074AK, once the monochrome effect is executed, at least the monochrome effect is continued until the variable display corresponding to the target pending display is started. And it becomes impossible to visually recognize the change of the active display. Therefore, when the front display mode changes, the change in the front display mode is made visible without executing the monochrome effect.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of display mode changes is one or more, that is, whether or not to execute a change effect (step 074AKS052 ). Whether or not the display mode change count is one or more may be determined by confirming the display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 10-9. When the display mode change count is 0 (step 074AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

If the display mode change count is one or more (step 074AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the monochrome effect according to the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 10-17 ( step 074AKS053). As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, when the monochrome effect is executed, the variable display result is determined to have a higher expectation of a big hit than when the monochrome effect is not executed. is assigned. Also, when the monochrome effect is executed, the determination ratio is assigned so as to be super reach or higher (super reach loss, small hit, big hit). Not limited to this, even in the case of normal reach loss or non-reach loss, monochrome effect may be executed at a lower rate than other variable display results. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the monochrome effect is assigned according to the variable display result. Different determination ratios may be used. For example, the determination rate may be highest when the display mode of the active display is "red", and the determination rate may decrease in the order of "green" > "blue" > "white". According to this, it is possible to inform the player that the display mode of the active display will finally change to a highly anticipated display color, and to give the player a sense of anticipation for the change in the active display.

Returning to FIG. 10-16, after executing the processing of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054). If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

If the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the end timing of the monochrome effect from "timing 1" to "timing 1" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 3” (step 074AKS055). The "timing 1" of the characteristic portion 074AK in this embodiment is the timing of the normal reach, that is, the timing immediately after entering the reach state, the "timing 2" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and the "timing 3 ” is the timing in the middle of the reach production of super reach. That is, "timing 1" is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing 2" is the next earliest, and "timing 3" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the feature part 074AK in this embodiment, the expectation level is "timing 3">"timing 2">"timing 1", and the end timing after the start of the variable display The determination ratio is set so that the longer the period (end timing is later) (in other words, the longer the execution period of the monochrome effect), the higher the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution period of the monochrome effect. In addition, as shown in the figure, if the variable display result is neither "big hit (probable / non-probable)", "big hit (probably)", or "losing (super reach) / small hit", but "other than the above" , no decision ratio is assigned because no monochrome effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-16, after executing the process of step 074AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing a monochrome effect (step 074AKS056). By performing the process of step 074AKS056, the execution of monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. In the characteristic portion 074AK of this embodiment, the pending display and the active display are displayed in the first stage "white" (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). In step 074AKS056, output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance are muted, and a game effect lamp for game effects is turned off. Control for extinguishing 9 is performed. After executing the processing of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120 sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then ends the monochrome effect setting process. In step 074AKS056, for example, when an image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors, black and white, by monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also changed to two colors, black and white. The number of colors may correspond to the number of colors.

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. If it is determined that it is neither a command (step 074AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pending display or the second pending display in the first stage (white) display mode (step 074AKS005A ).

After executing the processing of either step 074AKS005 or step 074AKS005A, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received in the processing of step 074AKS001 (step 074AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of variation. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (step 074AKS006). Effect control CPU120, for example, by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, whether or not the fluctuation start designation command is received It is necessary to determine whether If it is determined that the variation start designation command has not been received (step 074AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start designation command is received (step 074AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007). . When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 Referring to the display stage variation pattern stored in the storage area of the display stage variation pattern in the first start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), each first pending display is associated with It is changed or maintained according to the display step change pattern, and in the first reservation display portion 5HL of the image display device 5, the reservation display of the reservation display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and "2 ” to “4” are moved (shifted) one by one to the right (step 074AKS008).

After executing the processing of step 074AKS008, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the pending display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and corresponds to the pending display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS009), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the storage contents of the reserved display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start prize are derived and displayed after the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

In the processing of step 074AKS007, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the second start winning shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) By referring to the display step change pattern stored in the display step change pattern storage area in the hour command buffer, each second pending display is changed or maintained according to the display step change pattern associated with each, and the image display device In the second holding display portion 5HR of 5, the holding display of the holding display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and each second holding display corresponding to "2" to "4" is moved leftward one by one (step 074AKS010).

After executing the process of step 074AKS010, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the pending display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and corresponds to the pending display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS011), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the stored content of the pending display number "0" in the second start winning command buffer is derived and displayed after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the effect processing during variable display in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You can delete it later.

FIG. 10-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first, for example, based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11, etc. It is determined whether or not the result of the diagram display is "loss" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "losing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 receives, for example, the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area The variation pattern specified by the command) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode. It is determined whether or not (step S552).

When it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S552 (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S553 ). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the non-reach combination updated by the production random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. Determined decorative patterns (decorative patterns of non-ready-to-win combinations) are determined by referring to a pre-stored and prepared non-ready-to-win combination decorative pattern determination table.

When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S552 (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol combination of the ready-to-win combination (step S554 ). For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decoration pattern of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter, etc., and prepares the reach combination stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to the decorative design determination table, etc., the determined decorative design (decorative design of the reach combination) is determined.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "losing" in the process of step S551 (step S551; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "definite". Or, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S555). If it is determined that the special figure display result is "probability" or "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, an open chance eye, in the case of "probability" or "small hit". A combination of final decoration symbols corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). Effect control CPU120, for example, in response to the fact that either the variation pattern PC1-1 or PC1-2 is specified by the variation pattern specification command, out of the plurality of types of open chance eyes, the final A combination of fixed decoration patterns to be a stop pattern is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the chance number to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting section is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to it, it is sufficient to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that form one of the open chances. In the chance determination table, there are, for example, "3", "5" and "7" composed of odd numbers as the chances for the big hit, and "2" and "7" composed of even numbers as the chance for the small win. 4", "6", etc. may be set.

In the processing of step S555, if the special figure display result is determined to be neither "probably" nor "small hit" (step S555; No), the effect control CPU 120 is the final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination. A combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit determined symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect. Subsequently, according to the jackpot type specified by the display result specifying command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 is displayed by referring to a jackpot determination symbol determination table stored in advance and prepared in the ROM 121. The decoration symbols having the same symbol number, which are stop-displayed together in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the display area, are determined.

After executing any one of the processes of steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 performs a plurality of types of change effects with different periods from the start of the variable display until the display mode of the pending display changes. Of these, a change effect setting process for setting which type of change effect is to be executed is executed (step 074AKS021).

FIG. 10-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step 074AKS021 of FIG. 10-19. When the change effect setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display mode of any of the pending display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). In step 074AKS022, by referring to the display step change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. is changed, or whether the display mode of the active display is changed.

When the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the change effect of the success mode (step 074AKS023). , ends the change effect setting process. On the other hand, if the display mode of the pending display or the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the setting for executing the change effect of the failure mode or the setting not to execute the change effect is performed. (Step 074AKS024), the change effect setting process is terminated. In step 074AKS024, whether or not to execute the change effect of the failure mode may be determined according to the variable display result or the variation pattern, for example.

The effect of changing the success mode of the characterizing portion 074AK in this embodiment is the effect of changing the display mode when the shooting star image 074AK001 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed. The failure mode change effect is a effect in which the shooting star image 074AK002 collides with the pending display or active display to be changed, but the display mode is not changed. In both modes, the image of the shooting star is the same, and it is impossible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the object changes until after the collision. In addition, during the monochrome effect, the pending display and the active display of the change target are also displayed in monochrome, so it is not possible to visually recognize whether the executed change effect is a success mode or a failure mode. there is

In the processing of step 074AKS023 and step 074AKS024, when executing a change effect, the execution period (change effect period) of the change effect is also set. The change effect period may be any period as long as it is a period during which the variable display being executed is not performed during the ready-to-win effect of super reach. This is to prevent the player's attention from being dispersed due to the degree of expectation being dispersed between the ready-to-win effect being executed and the change effect.

Further, when there are a plurality of objects to be changed, any one of success mode, failure mode, and no change effect may be determined for each suspension (including active display). Further, when the display mode change pattern is determined, the pattern of the change effect may also be determined from among a plurality of patterns for one display mode change pattern.

Returning to the description of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-19, after executing the process of step 074AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the effect control pattern (step S560 ). Production control CPU 120, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, selects one of the prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) and uses it. set as a pattern. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (suspended display change pattern) corresponding to the execution setting of the pending display change effect by the pending display setting process of step S161, and selects the use pattern set as Also, when it is determined in step S559 that the specific effect is to be executed, one of the effect control patterns (specific effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution of the specific effect is selected and set as the usage pattern.

Following the process of step S560, the production control CPU 120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command, the production provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation) determined in the process of step S559 VDP of the display control unit 123 , etc., to start the fluctuation of the decorative design in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. All you have to do is

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. exit.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display executed in step S172 shown in FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S801). Production control CPU120, for example, to update the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update. Then, it is determined that the variable display time has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed in the process of step S801 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S802). The ready-to-win effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the ready-to-win effect (step S803).

After executing the process of step S803, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031). Since the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined to be one of the timings 1 to 3 at step 074AKS055 in FIG. It should be determined whether or not there is

If it is time to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect end control to end the monochrome effect (step 074AKS032), and clears the monochrome effect flag to the OFF state (step 074AKS032). 074AKS033). In the process of step 074AKS032, since the monochrome output process is completed, the number of colors used for the target image to be displayed in the monochrome mode returns to the normal number of colors. Therefore, control is performed to display the pending display and the active display whose display mode has been changed by the change effect in the display color after the change, and to output the success sound.

After executing the processing of step 074AKS033, if it is determined that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step S802 (step S802; No), or if it is determined that it is not the end timing of monochrome effect in step 074AKS031 (step 074AKS031; No), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS034). The change effect period is set in accordance with the setting to execute the change effect at step 074AKS023 or step 074AKS024 in FIG. 10-20. When it determines with it being a change production|presentation period (step 074AKS034; Yes), CPU120 for production|presentation control performs control for performing the change production|presentation of a success mode or a failure mode (step 074AKS035). In the process of step 074AKS035, during the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), since the monochrome output process is being performed, even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, Regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit, pending display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern. In addition, in the processing of step 074AKS035, the execution start sound of the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode, that is, the effect start sound for informing the player that the shooting star image has been displayed, and the success effect or failure effect are performed. A success sound or a failure sound that makes it audibly recognizable is output. However, during execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is ON), only the execution start sound is output, and the success sound or failure sound is not output. The success sound or the failure sound may be output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed, for example, by the processing of step 074AKS032. According to this, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the pending display or the active display to be changed is changed after the monochrome effect is finished.

After executing the process of step 074AKS035, or if it is not a change production period (step 074AKS034; No), the production control CPU 120 is, for example, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other , control for executing effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 808).

When it is determined that the variable display time has passed in the process of step S801 (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Then, control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S809). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined fixed time as a waiting time for receiving a command to start a big hit (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S812).

After executing any of the processes of steps S808 and S812, or when it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received in the process of step S809 (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display. End the process.

FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23 show examples of effect operations when a monochrome effect and a change effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 10-22(A), a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is displayed in a state in which three pending displays H1 to H3 are stored. In this state, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds, and the game effect lamp 9 for game effects is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H4 is displayed), monochrome effect setting processing is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 10-9, and monochrome effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22(B), in the image display device 5, the background image, the pending display, and the like are displayed in a monochrome mode, and the sound effects and production sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control is performed to mute the sound and turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. FIG. 10-22(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 10-22(A) is finished. Also, an example is shown in which the display mode of the pending display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. 10-12. In this example, it is assumed that timing C, which is the middle stage of super ready-to-win, is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect at step 074AKS055 in FIG. 10-16.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-22(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Since the suspension of the suspension display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the suspension display H4 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the effect of changing the success mode set in the process of step 074AKS023 in FIG. 10-20 is performed. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 10-22(C), even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, the execution start sound, that is, the image of the shooting star is displayed. Although the effect start sound for informing the player of the fact is output, the success sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22(D), the ready-to-win effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. As indicated by -22(F), each hold display shifts and a variable display corresponding to hold display H2 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display. Therefore, when the failure mode change effect is set in the process of step 074AKS024 in FIG. 10-20, the failure mode change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 10-22(F). Even if the failure mode change performance is executed, the execution start sound, that is, the performance start sound for informing the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the failure sound is not output. In addition, since the pending display is displayed in a monochrome mode during the monochrome presentation, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (success mode or failure mode).

Subsequently, when the game ball newly wins the first start winning slot (reservation display H5 is displayed), although the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 10-9, the monochrome effect is performed. Since it is being executed, the execution setting for monochrome effect is not performed (see FIG. 10-16), but the processing of steps 074AKS003 and 074AKS004 in FIG. 10-9 is executed, so the display mode of the pending display changes. It will happen. FIG. 10-22(G) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 10-22(F) is finished. Also, an example is shown in which the display mode of the pending display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 10-13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-22(H), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H3 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display form of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display, while the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to PT3. Since it changes according to the display mode change pattern of -2-04, the display mode of the pending display H5 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the failure mode is performed for the suspension display H4, and the change effect of the success mode is performed for the suspension display H5. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, the player cannot recognize whether each change effect is a success mode or a failure mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (I), the ready-to-win effect of super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. As indicated by -23(K), each hold display shifts, and a variable display corresponding to hold display H4 is started. Here, the suspension (active display AH) of the suspension display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, so the display mode of the active display AH changes in this variable display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-23(L), a success mode change effect is performed. In addition, FIG. 10-23(L) shows an example in which in the process of step 074AKS023 of FIG. 10-20, the change effect period is set during the reach effect of super reach. On the other hand, the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 10-13, so the display mode of the hold display H5 does not change in this variable display. The illustrated example shows an example of a case where the change effect is set not to be executed in the process of step 074AKS024 of FIG. 10-20 for the suspension of the suspension display H5.

When it becomes the middle stage of super reach, it is determined that it is the end timing of monochrome effect at step 074AKS031 in FIG. 10-21, and as shown in FIG. The game effect lamp 9 is lit, and success sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, if the display mode changes even once during the monochrome effect, a success sound is output. In such a case, the success sound may be output once after the failure sound is output twice, so that the player can recognize by hearing how many times the display mode has changed. . According to this, it is possible to inform the player of the timing when the display mode is changed, thereby improving the interest in the game. As shown in FIG. 10-23(M), when the monochrome rendering ends, the display color of the pending display H5 and the display color of the active display AH become visible. After that, the variable display ends. In the example shown in FIG. 10-23(M), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit". Since the pending display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 10-13, the display mode is "green" in the example shown in FIG. 10-23(M). In addition to the color, the shape may be changed as the change of the display mode. Further, for example, the color of the effect image displayed around the active display and the suspended display may be changed. Furthermore, in addition to changing the shape of the active display and the hold display, the color of the effect image may also be changed. Such a change may be performed during the monochrome effect, or the monochrome effect may be started by performing these changes.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 074AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the expectation level. In the specific effect state, a monochrome output process is performed to display the display mode of the suspended display and the active display in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. Then, when the specific effect state shifts to the normal effect state, the monochrome output process is finished, and the display modes of the pending display and the active display are displayed in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the pending display and the active display in the first stage "white" regardless of the degree of expectation during the specific effect state. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be appropriately notified by color, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the process of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120, for example, when the monochrome object image is displayed in two colors, black and white, by monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also two colors, black and white. The number of colors is set to correspond to the number of colors of a monochrome image, such as . According to this, it is possible to emphasize the specific effect state and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing a monochrome effect (monochrome output process) in the process of step 074AKS056. As a result, monochrome target images, such as pending display, active display, and background image, are displayed in monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the specific effect state and improve the game interest.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 silences the output sound during the specific effect state, outputs only the execution start sound and does not output the success sound or the failure sound for the change effect. According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect state stand out and to recognize the start of execution of the change effect. Then, the success sound or the failure sound is output at the timing when the monochrome effect ends. According to this, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the specific display such as the hold display or the active display has changed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 074AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, the one described in the above embodiment It may have a configuration of parts. Moreover, at least a part of each of the following modified examples may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display corresponding to variable display and the background image are in the monochrome mode, but this is just an example. For example, in addition to the display corresponding to the variable display, an image that informs the degree of expectation for the big hit by the color to be displayed, such as the degree of expectation by the color of the displayed character or message, may be in a monochrome mode. According to this, as the production effect of the specific production state, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable more suitably, and it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is not an image displayed by lottery on the side of the effect control board 12 (not an image displayed by lottery according to the degree of expectation), but by a command or the like sent from the main board 11 side. An image (special information) for displaying information shall be displayed in a normal mode (for example, full color), not in a monochrome mode. Specifically, it consists only of numbers, for example, odd numbers are displayed in red and even numbers are displayed in blue (displayed in the same color as the decoration pattern), always small patterns that are always visible to the player, special symbols By displaying the number of reservations of 1 and special figure 2 with numbers, the number of reservations that can be specified by the player, and the display of the number of reservations, and the right-handed display, etc., should be controlled so as not to be in the monochrome mode in the monochrome production. Just do it. In addition, since the right-handed display is displayed in the variable probability state, it may be possible to execute the monochrome effect even in the variable probability state. Furthermore, in the normal effect state, the small symbols, the always reserved number display, the right-handed display, etc. may be displayed in a monochrome mode, and in the specific effect state, they may be displayed in another color such as red. According to this, it is possible to recognize the contents suggested by the special information even in the specific effect state, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the specific effect state, the display corresponding to the variable display (specific display) such as the pending display and the active display is displayed in the first stage "white", but the normal effect state It may be displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in , and is displayed only in a specific effect state (for example, it is displayed in gray regardless of the degree of expectation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the suspended display or the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed is shown, but this is just an example. For example, without executing the process of step 074AKS052 in FIGS. 10-16, a monochrome effect may be executed regardless of whether the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the timing for starting execution of the monochrome effect is the start winning timing (that is, the timing at which the game medium has won a prize), but this is just an example. The execution timing of the monochrome effect may be a predetermined timing during the variable display. The execution timing may be such that the player cannot specify to what stage the color of the frame has changed until the end of the monochrome effect. That is, as long as the monochrome effect can be executed during the execution of the effect of informing the degree of expectation of the big hit by the color to be displayed, the execution timing of the monochrome effect may be any timing.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 075AK of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 075AK of this embodiment, unlike the characteristic part 074AK, the monochrome effect ends by changing the display mode (display color) of the specific display such as the pending display and the active display. That is, the change timing is the ending timing of the monochrome effect. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 075AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that descriptions of portions similar to those described in the basic description above and portions similar to those described in the characteristic portion 074AK will be omitted.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing executed by the characterizing portion 075AK. It should be noted that the same numbers as those of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9 are attached to the parts that perform the same processing as the pre-reading notice setting process executed in the characteristic portion 074AK. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-25, in step 074AKS003, after determining the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed, the setting process such as monochrome effect is executed ( step 075AKS001). The monochrome effect setting process of step 075AKS001 is a process of determining whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed, the end timing thereof, and the display mode change pattern of the pending display and the active display.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 075AKS001 of FIG. 10-24. Note that, in the illustrated example, the same numbers as in FIG. 10-16 are attached to the portions that perform the same processing as the monochrome effect setting processing in FIG. 10-16. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state, as in the monochrome effect setting process of FIG. 10-16. (Step 074AKS051), if it is off (Step 074AKS051; No), whether or not there is a hold (including active display) whose display mode changes before the current hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice That is, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the pending or active display present in the foreground (the display mode for the foreground) changes (step 074AKS051A). If the monochrome effect flag is ON (step 074AKS051; Yes) or if the front display mode changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the monochrome effect setting process.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" (step 075AKS012). Whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" may be determined by confirming the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 of FIG. 10-24. If the display mode of the active display is "white" (step 075AKS012; No), that is, if the display mode of the active display does not change from the pending display, the effect control CPU 120, according to the number of pending, PT4-4-01 , PT3-1-01, or PT2-2-01 (not shown), and the monochrome effect setting process is terminated.

If the display mode of the active display is ``blue'', ``green'', or ``red'' other than ``white'' (step 075AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 indicates whether or not the monochrome effect is executed as a variable display result. Accordingly, it is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 10-17 (step 074AKS053). After executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054).

If the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120, according to the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15, The display mode change pattern is determined according to the display mode of the active display determined in step 074 AKS003 and the number of reserved memories indicated by either the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command ( Step 075 (AKS013), the process for setting monochrome effect etc. is terminated.

If the monochrome effect is to be executed, that is, if the monochrome effect is to be executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 follows the display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. Determine the display mode change pattern according to the display mode of the active display determined in 074AKS003 and the number of reserved memories indicated by either the first special figure reserved memory number designation command or the second special figure reserved memory number designation command (step 075AKS014).

The display mode change pattern determination table (for monochrome) shown in FIG. 10-26(A) is a table that is referred to for determining the change pattern of the display mode of the suspended display and the active display when executing the monochrome effect. . In the characteristic part 075AK, when the monochrome effect is executed, the change pattern is determined such that only the display mode of the active display is changed without changing the display mode of the suspension display. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the pending display is "white", and the display mode of the active display is "blue" to "red" so that the display mode change pattern is determined. Each display mode change pattern is set accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 10-25, after determining the display step change pattern in step 075AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing of changing the active display according to the active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 10-26(B). is determined to be one of the timings A to C according to the display mode of the active display (step 075AKS015).

The "timing A" of the characteristic portion 075AK in this embodiment is the timing before the reach state, that is, the timing immediately before entering the reach state, the "timing B" is the timing at the start of the reach effect of super reach, ” is the timing in the middle of the reach production of super reach. That is, "timing A" timing is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, "timing B" is the next earliest timing, and "timing C" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 10-26, in the characteristic portion 075AK of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with high expectations in the order of "timing C" > "timing B" > "timing A". The determination ratio is set such that the later the timing from the start of the variable display until the change occurs, the higher the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the display color expected by the player. It is

Returning to FIG. 10-25, after executing the process of step 075AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing immediately after the change timing determined in the process of step 075AKS015 as the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 075AKS016). As a result, the monochrome output process ends at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes, and the active display is displayed in the changed display mode. After executing the processing of step 075AKS016, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056), sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and performs the monochrome effect, etc. End the setting process. By performing the processing of step 074AKS056, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output processing) is started, and thereby, the image of the monochrome mode object such as the suspended display, the active display, the background image, etc. The points to be displayed are the same as those of the characteristic portion 074AK. Also, in the specific effect state during monochrome effect execution, the pending display and active display are displayed in the first stage “white” (displayed in a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). , control to mute output sounds such as sound effects and performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome performance, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. is the same as the characteristic portion 074AK.

Returning to FIG. 10-24, after executing the process of step 074AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 is, according to the display mode change pattern determined in step 075AKS013 or step 075AKS014 of FIG. 10-25, the first pending display or the second pending display is displayed (step 075AKS002). After executing the process of step 075AKS002, the same process as the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9 is performed (the same process as the feature part 074AK is performed).

FIG. 10-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect setting process performed in the variable display start setting process in the characteristic portion 075AK (see FIG. 10-19). Note that the change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 075AK differs in that the processing of steps 075AKS021 to step 075AKS023 is executed in addition to the change effect setting processing performed in the characteristic portion 074AK, but the other points are the same. do.

When the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-27 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021). When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 075AKS021; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps 074AKS022 to step 074AKS024 in the same manner as the characteristic part 074AK.

On the other hand, when the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022). ). When the display mode of the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the change effect setting process as it is.

When the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change effect pattern, which is the execution pattern of the change effect, to the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-28. According to (step 075AKS023), after setting according to the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 10-25, the change effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-28 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, when the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. At the start of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, which is the timing, the changing performance of the failure mode is performed, and at the middle of the super-ready-to-win, which is the timing, the changing performance of the success mode is performed. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. At the start of a ready-to-win performance of a certain super ready-to-win, a variation performance pattern of pattern 2 is set to execute a success mode variation performance. If the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 10-25 is timing C, that is, immediately before the ready-to-reach state, the change effect pattern of pattern 3 that executes the change effect of the success mode immediately before the ready-to-reach state that is timing A. is set.

Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the change effect of the failure mode is executed at the timing when the display mode of the active display does not change, there may be a pattern in which the change effect is not executed.

FIG. 10-29 is a diagram showing an effect operation example when a monochrome effect and a change effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 10-29(A), a state in which one pending display H1 is stored and a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is being performed. In , output sounds such as sound effects and production sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 for game effects is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning slot, the pending display H2 is displayed, and the display mode of the active display is determined in the pre-reading advance notice setting process of FIG. 10-24, and the monochrome effect setting process When the monochrome effect is executed at , as shown in FIG. 10-29 (B), in the image display device 5, the background image, the hold display, etc. are displayed in a monochrome mode, and the effects from the speakers 8L and 8R Control is performed to mute output sounds such as sounds and effect sounds and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for game effects. FIG. 10-29(B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 10-29(A) is finished. Further, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display in the pending display H2 is determined to be "red" (step 074AKS003 in FIG. 10-24), and is determined to be the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 (FIG. 10-25 step 075AKS014), and the active display change timing is determined to be timing C (step 075AKS015 in FIG. 10-25). That is, according to the changing effect pattern of pattern 1, the changing effects of the failure mode and the success mode are executed (see FIGS. 10-27 and 10-28).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-29(C), when each pending display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is started, the pending display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(D), when the variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 is completed and the variable display corresponding to the pending display H2 is started, as shown in FIG. 10-29(E) , the pending display H2 is displayed as the active display AH. The example shown in FIG. 10-29(E) shows an example of the timing (timing A) immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 enters the ready state. Since the change effect of failure mode and success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of pattern 1, in the illustrated example, when the change effect of failure mode is performed at the timing (timing A) immediately before the ready-to-win state. It shows about It should be noted that, in the changing effect, the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound for informing the player that the image of the shooting star has been displayed is output, but the success sound and failure sound are not output. is similar to

Then, after reaching the ready-to-win state, when the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win is started (at the timing of timing B), as shown in FIG. At timing C in the middle of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (G), a success mode change effect is performed, and this becomes the end timing of the monochrome effect, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (H). , the monochrome effect is completed, and accordingly, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is turned on, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 10-29(H), when the display mode of the active display is changed, the monochrome rendering ends, and the display color of the active display AH becomes visible. In the example shown in FIG. 10-29(H), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 in FIG. , and the variable display result after that is "big hit".

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 075AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and during execution of the monochrome effect (specific effect state), the number of colors of images including pending display and active display is displayed less than in the normal effect state. In the specific production state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the normal production state, and in the normal production state, by executing the change production, the display color of the pending display and the active display is changed to a color according to the expectation level. In the specific effect state, the specific effect state is shifted to the normal effect state at the timing immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, the performance pattern becomes diverse, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a success mode change effect that changes the display mode of the active display and a failure mode change effect that does not change the display mode of the active display. Then, the monochrome effect is terminated at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the active display has changed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 starts the monochrome effect by executing the setting process such as the monochrome effect in the pre-reading notice setting process executed at the timing when the pending display is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game medium wins. Then, after the variable display corresponding to the pending display of the target is started and displayed as the active display, the monochrome presentation is terminated at the timing immediately after the success mode change presentation is executed for the active display. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display color of the active display has changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display at one of the timings A to C. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(B), the later the change timing is, the more the display mode changes to the active display with higher expectations. According to this, the effect pattern becomes various and the game interest can be improved.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 075AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, the one described in the above embodiment It may have a configuration of parts. Moreover, at least a part of each of the following modified examples may be combined. Furthermore, all or part of the features shown in the modification of the feature portion 074AK may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes in the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect is determined by the process of step 075AKS015 in FIG. In addition to this, for example, even in the normal effect state, the timing at which the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes is the timing A in FIG. 10-26(B). to timing C may be determined. In this case, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes may be determined to be the timing C more frequently in the specific effect state than in the normal effect state. According to this, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the specific effect state during execution of the monochrome effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the timing of ending the monochrome effect is immediately after the display mode of the active display changes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the same timing as the timing of the change. In addition, the timing immediately after the change in the display mode of the pending display, or the timing at which the display mode changes, may be set as the end timing of the monochrome effect, not limited to the display mode of the active display. That is, the end timing of the specific effect state may include at least the timing when the change effect is executed and the display mode (display color) of the pending display or the active display changes. It may be the timing immediately after, or the end timing of the changed variable display. In this case, when the number of pending memories is "3" or more, the monochrome effect can be executed, and the timing after the display mode changes after the pending display shifts twice is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. Just do it. Specifically, in the setting process for monochrome effects, etc. in FIG. Counts the number of times pending has shifted since execution began. Then, when the count value is "2" or more, it is determined that the end condition of the monochrome effect is satisfied, and the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes thereafter may be determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. According to this, although the condition for ending the monochrome effect is that the display mode changes, it is possible to secure a viewing period for the monochrome effect, and to improve the effect of the effect.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed has been shown, but this is just an example. Even when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change (that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change, it may be decided to execute the monochrome effect). ). In this case, the monochrome effect may end when the variable display corresponding to the suspension that was the object when it was decided to execute the monochrome effect ends.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-30 to 10-44.

FIG. 10-30 is part of a flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, after the execution of the prefetching notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. 42) after executing the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending memory display displayed in accordance with the received command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning, any of the processing of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. is set to run. The start winning command buffer 153SG194A corresponds to the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer in the characteristic portion 074AK (see FIG. 10-7). Is the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storage of the first special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") and the variable display A storage area corresponding to the first special figure (an area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0" and corresponding to active display) is provided. In addition, in the startup winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0” and corresponding to active display) are provided.

FIG. 10-31 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-30. In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the receive command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning (153SGS241), and determines whether or not there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the advance notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (announcement type) are determined at the determined ratio as shown in FIG. 10-32(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-32(A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, four types of display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pending display previous notice effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-32(A), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(A) and 10-32(B), in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for being controlled to the big win gaming state than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B), when the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 10-31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry to read ahead. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 10-33 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of matching decorative patterns (big hit pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to 153SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach, suggesting effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). In other words, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect or setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only in the display, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time.

It should be noted that in the variable display of super reach in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-41, the result of the variable display becomes a big hit as a suggestive effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggestive performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) is determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided in the process of 153SGS278 not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the process proceeds to 153SGS285, and if it is decided in the process of 153SGS278 to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the process proceeds to the front part from the start of the variable display. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of the character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, execution of the front variable display suggestive effect is not determined unless execution of the rear variable display effect is determined. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, timer effects and character effects are not executed as suggestive effects during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 10-41 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 10-41 (B), the value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 that is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 10-34 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-33. 9-34, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the received command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning to specify the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, the ratio of 90% determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, the ratio of 10% determines the execution of the big hit suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and the ratio of 0% determines the performance of the rear. Execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance of the suggested performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 35% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 35% as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 30% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 70% determines the performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

In addition, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the pending display advance notice effect for the variable display, it can be used as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggesting effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, the game is more concerned with whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-34, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process of determining the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big win suggesting performance is determined as the rear variable display suggesting performance, the performance pattern of the big hit suggesting performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggesting performance determination processing is performed. End (153SGS305).

Incidentally, as the effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305, as shown in FIG. 10-35(B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is: This is an effect pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than the pattern AS-1, and the putter AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. It is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the process of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 10-36, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

Incidentally, as the determinable effect patterns in 153SG307, as shown in FIG. 10-35(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In this characteristic portion 153SG, setting values 1 to 4 are set low and setting values 5 and 6 are high, but setting values 1 to 3 may be low and setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set to low, setting values 3 and 4 to intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 to high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 10-37. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at the rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the set value of 6 is determined.

FIG. 10-38 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-33. 10-38, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestive performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-39(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, at a rate of 5%, execution of a timer effect is determined as a suggestive effect during front variable display.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big hit, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. An effect to be executed as a suggestive effect during presence/absence and front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-39(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-38, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, the forward part is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during front variable display is completed. (153 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Among these production patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of a big win. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS317, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. , and 80% of the time, pattern CS-2 is determined. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable part display is terminated (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 10-39(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See FIGS. 10-40(C), 10-42(D) and 10-42(E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, the player can be made to pay attention to the character displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect period of the timer effect. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 to 10-41, when it is determined to execute the front variable display suggesting effect during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (A) and 10-41 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic part 153SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed over 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-42 to 10-44. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-42 (A) and 10-42 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42(C) to 10-42(E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the aspect of the camera is started, the front portion A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-43(F) to 10-43(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big win suggesting performance or a setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 10-43 (J) is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and if the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, then the pattern shown in FIG. As indicated by -43(K), the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!".

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. For this reason, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating the degree of expectation of the big win. As shown in -39 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggestive effect set as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (see FIGS. 10-42 (D) and 10-42 (E)). This example shows a form of notifying more clearly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display suggests The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-43(H) and 10-44(L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is set to 0. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect are performed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not executed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-40(B) and 10-40(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 with a effect period of 25 seconds and a pattern with a effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the super ready-to-win variable display. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggesting effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect which is the latter half of the variable display of the super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

10-31 and 10-35, the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment changes the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-reading notice to a white square or a star, or a blue or red camera. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. For this reason, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the display mode is blue or red, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-44, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the object of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, a mode in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the end of the pending display notice effect) corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-32, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is the same as that of displaying the reserved memory display in a white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the mode of the blue or red camera is set to the state of the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect such as a white square or star shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

It should be noted that, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the speaker 8L, 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It is executable, and as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect is different between the case of displaying in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-33, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with the long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure variation time of the shortened non-reach variation pattern, so during variable display of super reach (reach effect (during execution), it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-32, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that it is a variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-32, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, display pending Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 to 10-41, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

(Modified example of characteristic portion 153SG)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue 10-46(A) and 10-46(A) and As shown in FIG. 10-46(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera (displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera due to the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera being blocked by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is given of a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 10-47(A) and 10-47(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds (shorter than 5.75 seconds)) may be executed setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode. The decision ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in the case of displaying in the form of the red camera and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be executed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as the pending display forewarning effect are shown. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the reserved memory display. Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which setting suggestive effects can be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effects during the variable display in which the timer effects as the suggestive effects during the front variable display are executed. , the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggesting effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in this invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect is already executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Furthermore, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if it is an effect that can be executed from the timing before the target variable display starts.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration related to the characteristic portion 074AK, the configuration related to the characteristic portion 075AK, and the configuration related to the characteristic portion 153SG may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions. For example, in the characteristic part 074AK or the characteristic part 075AK, when the display mode changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit due to the change effect during the monochrome effect, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is set to be high like the characteristic part 153SG. good too. According to this, since the setting suggesting effect is executed while the player is paying attention to the subsequent development by executing the effect in which the ratio of being controlled to be in a relatively advantageous state is high, the setting suggestion effect by the player is executed. It is possible to prevent overlooking of the suggestive production.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect for updating and displaying a predetermined display and capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state;
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, it is possible to display a first predetermined display and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display, which are displays suggesting the start timing of the suggestive effect, and
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display, and a numerical value that is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display and is displayed as the second predetermined display. A second update display that performs a decreasing update display can be performed such that at least a portion of each update display period overlaps,
the suggestive effect can be started when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display;
When the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display decreases to a specific numerical value greater than 0 in the second update display, the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display stops decreasing, and the specific numerical value is reached. terminating the second predetermined display that has become a numerical value, and starting the suggestive effect in the display area of the second predetermined display ;
A gaming machine capable of executing an interlocking effect interlocked with the update display of the second predetermined display.

Images